version 20171215
Abstract
“All mail clients suck. This one just sucks less.”— me, circa 1995
Table of Contents
List of Tables
List of Examples
mime.types
Table of Contents
NeoMutt is a small but very powerful text-based MIME mail client. NeoMutt is highly configurable, and is well suited to the mail power user with advanced features like key bindings, keyboard macros, mail threading, regular expression searches and a powerful pattern matching language for selecting groups of messages.
The homepage can be found at https://www.neomutt.org/.
<neomutt-users@neomutt.org>
— help, bug reports and
feature requests. To subscribe to this list, please send a mail to
<neomutt-users-request@neomutt.org>
with the subject
"subscribe".
<neomutt-devel@neomutt.org>
— development mailing list.
To subscribe to this list, please send a mail to
<neomutt-devel-request@neomutt.org>
with the subject
"subscribe".
Bugs may be reported on the devel mailing list, or on GitHub: https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/issues
For the IRC user community, visit channel #neomutt on irc.freenode.net.
There are various ways to contribute to the NeoMutt project.
Especially for new users it may be helpful to meet other new and experienced users to chat about NeoMutt, talk about problems and share tricks.
Since translations of NeoMutt into other languages are highly appreciated, the NeoMutt developers always look for skilled translators that help improve and continue to maintain stale translations.
For contributing code patches for new features and bug fixes, please refer to the developer pages at https://www.neomutt.org/dev.html for more details.
This section lists typographical conventions followed throughout this manual. See table Table 1.1, “Typographical conventions for special terms”for typographical conventions for special terms.
Table 1.1. Typographical conventions for special terms
Item | Refers to... |
---|---|
printf(3)
| UNIX manual pages, execute
man 3 printf |
<PageUp>
| named keys |
<create-alias>
| named NeoMutt function |
^G
| Control+G key combination |
$mail_check | NeoMutt configuration option |
$HOME
| environment variable |
Examples are presented as:
neomutt -v
Within command synopsis, curly brackets ( “{}”) denote a set of options of which one is mandatory, square brackets ( “[]”) denote optional arguments, three dots denote that the argument may be repeated arbitrary times.
NeoMutt is Copyright © 1996-2016 Michael R. Elkins
<me@neomutt.org>
and others.
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
Table of Contents
This section is intended as a brief overview of how to use NeoMutt. There are many other features which are described elsewhere in the manual. There is even more information available in the NeoMutt FAQ and various web pages. See the NeoMutt homepage for more details.
The keybindings described in this section are the defaults as distributed. Your local system administrator may have altered the defaults for your site. You can always type “?”in any menu to display the current bindings.
The first thing you need to do is invoke NeoMutt, simply by typing
neomutt
at the command line. There are various command-line
options, see either the NeoMutt man page or the
reference.
NeoMutt is a text-based application which interacts with users through different menus which are mostly line-/entry-based or page-based. A line-based menu is the so-called “index” menu (listing all messages of the currently opened folder) or the “alias” menu (allowing you to select recipients from a list). Examples for page-based menus are the “pager”(showing one message at a time) or the “help” menu listing all available key bindings.
The user interface consists of a context sensitive help line at the top, the menu's contents followed by a context sensitive status line and finally the command line. The command line is used to display informational and error messages as well as for prompts and for entering interactive commands.
NeoMutt is configured through variables which, if the user wants to permanently use a non-default value, are written to configuration files. NeoMutt supports a rich config file syntax to make even complex configuration files readable and commentable.
Because NeoMutt allows for customizing almost all key bindings, there are so-called “functions” which can be executed manually (using the command line) or in macros. Macros allow the user to bind a sequence of commands to a single key or a short key sequence instead of repeating a sequence of actions over and over.
Many commands (such as saving or copying a message to another folder) can be applied to a single message or a set of messages (so-called “tagged” messages). To help selecting messages, NeoMutt provides a rich set of message patterns (such as recipients, sender, body contents, date sent/received, etc.) which can be combined into complex expressions using the boolean and and or operations as well as negating. These patterns can also be used to (for example) search for messages or to limit the index to show only matching messages.
NeoMutt supports a “hook” concept which allows the user to execute arbitrary configuration commands and functions in certain situations such as entering a folder, starting a new message or replying to an existing one. These hooks can be used to highly customize NeoMutt's behavior including managing multiple identities, customizing the display for a folder or even implementing auto-archiving based on a per-folder basis and much more.
Besides an interactive mode, NeoMutt can also be used as a
command-line tool only send messages. It also supports a
mailx(1)
-compatible interface, see
Table 9.1, “Command line options”for a complete list of
command-line options.
The index is the screen that you usually see first when you start NeoMutt. It gives an overview over your emails in the currently opened mailbox. By default, this is your system mailbox. The information you see in the index is a list of emails, each with its number on the left, its flags (new email, important email, email that has been forwarded or replied to, tagged email, ...), the date when email was sent, its sender, the email size, and the subject. Additionally, the index also shows thread hierarchies: when you reply to an email, and the other person replies back, you can see the other person's email in a "sub-tree" below. This is especially useful for personal email between a group of people or when you've subscribed to mailing lists.
The pager is responsible for showing the email content. On the top of the pager you have an overview over the most important email headers like the sender, the recipient, the subject, and much more information. How much information you actually see depends on your configuration, which we'll describe below.
Below the headers, you see the email body which usually contains the message. If the email contains any attachments, you will see more information about them below the email body, or, if the attachments are text files, you can view them directly in the pager.
To give the user a good overview, it is possible to configure NeoMutt to show different things in the pager with different colors. Virtually everything that can be described with a regular expression can be colored, e.g. URLs, email addresses or smileys.
The file browser is the interface to the local or remote file system. When selecting a mailbox to open, the browser allows custom sorting of items, limiting the items shown by a regular expression and a freely adjustable format of what to display in which way. It also allows for easy navigation through the file system when selecting file(s) to attach to a message, select multiple files to attach and many more.
The Sidebar shows a list of all your mailboxes. The list can be turned on and off, it can be themed and the list style can be configured.
This part of the manual is suitable for beginners. If you already know NeoMutt you could skip ahead to the main Sidebar guide. If you just want to get started, you could use the sample Sidebar neomuttrc.
To check if NeoMutt supports
“Sidebar”, look for the string
+sidebar
in the neomutt version.
neomutt -v
Let's turn on the Sidebar:
set sidebar_visible set sidebar_format = "%B%?F? [%F]?%* %?N?%N/?%S" set mail_check_stats
You will see something like this. A list of mailboxes on the left. A list of emails, from the selected mailbox, on the right.
Fruit [1] 3/8| 1 + Jan 24 Rhys Lee (192) Yew Animals [1] 2/6| 2 + Feb 11 Grace Hall (167) Ilama Cars 4| 3 Feb 23 Aimee Scott (450) Nectarine Seas 1/7| 4 ! Feb 28 Summer Jackson (264) Lemon | 5 Mar 07 Callum Harrison (464) Raspberry | 6 N + Mar 24 Samuel Harris (353) Tangerine | 7 N + Sep 05 Sofia Graham (335) Cherry | 8 N Sep 16 Ewan Brown (105) Ugli | |
This user has four mailboxes: “Fruit”, “Cars”, “Animals” and “Seas”.
The current, open, mailbox is “Fruit”. We can also see information about the other mailboxes. For example: The “Animals” mailbox contains, 1 flagged email, 2 new emails out of a total of 6 emails.
The Sidebar adds some new functions to NeoMutt.
The user pressed the
“c” key to
<change-folder>
to the
“Animals” mailbox. The Sidebar automatically updated the
indicator to match.
Fruit [1] 3/8| 1 Jan 03 Tia Gibson (362) Caiman Animals [1] 2/6| 2 + Jan 22 Rhys Lee ( 48) Dolphin Cars 4| 3 ! Aug 16 Ewan Brown (333) Hummingbird Seas 1/7| 4 Sep 25 Grace Hall ( 27) Capybara | 5 N + Nov 12 Evelyn Rogers (453) Tapir | 6 N + Nov 16 Callum Harrison (498) Hedgehog | | | |
Let's map some functions:
bind index,pager \CP sidebar-prev # Ctrl-Shift-P - Previous Mailbox bind index,pager \CN sidebar-next # Ctrl-Shift-N - Next Mailbox bind index,pager \CO sidebar-open # Ctrl-Shift-O - Open Highlighted Mailbox
Press “Ctrl-Shift-N”(Next mailbox) twice will move the Sidebar highlight to down to the “Seas” mailbox.
Fruit [1] 3/8| 1 Jan 03 Tia Gibson (362) Caiman Animals [1] 2/6| 2 + Jan 22 Rhys Lee ( 48) Dolphin Cars 4| 3 ! Aug 16 Ewan Brown (333) Hummingbird Seas 1/7| 4 Sep 25 Grace Hall ( 27) Capybara | 5 N + Nov 12 Evelyn Rogers (453) Tapir | 6 N + Nov 16 Callum Harrison (498) Hedgehog | | | |
Functions
<sidebar-next>
and
<sidebar-prev>
move the Sidebar
highlight. They
do not change the open
mailbox.
Press
“Ctrl-Shift-O”(
<sidebar-open>
) to open the highlighted
mailbox.
Fruit [1] 3/8| 1 ! Mar 07 Finley Jones (139) Molucca Sea Animals [1] 2/6| 2 + Mar 24 Summer Jackson ( 25) Arafura Sea Cars 4| 3 + Feb 28 Imogen Baker (193) Pechora Sea Seas 1/7| 4 N + Feb 23 Isla Hussain (348) Balearic Sea | | | | | |
The Sidebar shows a list of mailboxes in a panel.
Everything about the Sidebar can be configured.
Visibility
Width
Display all
Limit to mailboxes with new mail
Whitelist mailboxes to display always
The order in which mailboxes are displayed
Unsorted (order of mailboxes commands)
Sorted alphabetically
Sorted by number of new mails
Sidebar indicators and divider
Mailboxes depending on their type
Mailboxes depending on their contents
Hide/Unhide the Sidebar
Select previous/next mailbox
Select previous/next mailbox with new mail
Page up/down through a list of mailboxes
Misc
Support for Unicode mailbox names (UTF-8)
Everything about the Sidebar can be configured.
For a quick reference:
The most important variable is
$sidebar_visible
. You can set this in your
“neomuttrc”, or bind a key to the function
<sidebar-toggle-visible>
.
set sidebar_visible # Make the Sidebar visible by default bind index,pager B sidebar-toggle-visible # Use 'B' to switch the Sidebar on and off
Next, decide how wide you want the Sidebar to be. 25 characters might be enough for the mailbox name and some numbers. Remember, you can hide/show the Sidebar at the press of button.
Finally, you might want to change the divider character. By default, Sidebar draws an ASCII line between it and the Index panel If your terminal supports it, you can use a Unicode line-drawing character.
set sidebar_width = 25 # Plenty of space set sidebar_divider_char = '│' # Pretty line-drawing character
$sidebar_format
allows you to customize the
Sidebar display. For an introduction, read
format strings including the
section about
conditionals.
The default value is:
%B%* %n
A more detailed value is:
%B%?F? [%F]?%* %?N?%N/?%S
Which breaks down as:
%B
- Mailbox name
%?F? [%F]?
- If flagged emails
[%F]
, otherwise nothing
%*
- Pad with spaces
%?N?%N/?
- If new emails
%N/
, otherwise nothing
%S
- Total number of emails
Table 2.1. sidebar_format
Format | Notes | Description |
---|---|---|
%B | Name of the mailbox | |
%S | * † | Size of mailbox (total number of messages) |
%F | * † | Number of Flagged messages in the mailbox |
%N | * † | Number of New messages in the mailbox |
%n | * | If there's new mail, display “N”, otherwise nothing |
%! | “!”: one flagged message; “!!”: two flagged messages; “n!”: n flagged messages (for n > 2). Otherwise prints nothing. | |
%d | * ‡ | Number of deleted messages |
%L | * ‡ | Number of messages after limiting |
%t | * ‡ | Number of tagged messages |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with “X” | |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with “X” | |
%*X | Soft-fill with character “X” as pad |
* = Can be optionally printed if nonzero
† = To use this expandos, you must first:
set mail_check_stats
‡ = Only applicable to the current folder
Here are some examples. They show the number of (F)lagged, (N)ew and (S)ize.
Table 2.2. sidebar_format
Format | Example |
---|---|
%B%?F? [%F]?%* %?N?%N/?%S
|
mailbox [F] N/S |
%B%* %F:%N:%S
|
mailbox F:N:S |
%B %?N?(%N)?%* %S
|
mailbox (N) S |
%B%* ?F?%F/?%N
|
mailbox F/S |
$sidebar_delim_chars
tells Sidebar how to split
up mailbox paths. For local directories use
“/”; for IMAP folders use
“.”
This example works well if your mailboxes have unique names after the last separator.
Add some mailboxes of different depths.
set folder="~/mail" mailboxes =fruit/apple =fruit/banana =fruit/cherry mailboxes =water/sea/sicily =water/sea/archipelago =water/sea/sibuyan mailboxes =water/ocean/atlantic =water/ocean/pacific =water/ocean/arctic
Shorten the names:
set sidebar_short_path # Shorten mailbox names (truncate all subdirs) set sidebar_component_depth=1 # Shorten mailbox names (truncate 1 subdirs) set sidebar_delim_chars="/" # Delete everything up to the last or Nth / character
The screenshot below shows what the Sidebar would look like
before and after shortening using sidebar_short_path
.
|fruit/apple |apple |fruit/banana |banana |fruit/cherry |cherry |water/sea/sicily |sicily |water/sea/archipelago |archipelago |water/sea/sibuyan |sibuyan |water/ocean/atlantic |atlantic |water/ocean/pacific |pacific |water/ocean/arctic |arctic
The screenshot below shows what the Sidebar would look like
before and after shortening using sidebar_component_depth=1
.
|fruit/apple |apple |fruit/banana |banana |fruit/cherry |cherry |water/sea/sicily |sea/sicily |water/sea/archipelago |sea/archipelago |water/sea/sibuyan |sea/sibuyan |water/ocean/atlantic |ocean/atlantic |water/ocean/pacific |ocean/pacific |water/ocean/arctic |ocean/arctic
This example works well if you have lots of mailboxes which are arranged in a tree.
Add some mailboxes of different depths.
set folder="~/mail" mailboxes =fruit mailboxes =fruit/apple =fruit/banana =fruit/cherry mailboxes =water mailboxes =water/sea mailboxes =water/sea/sicily =water/sea/archipelago =water/sea/sibuyan mailboxes =water/ocean mailboxes =water/ocean/atlantic =water/ocean/pacific =water/ocean/arctic
Shorten the names:
set sidebar_short_path # Shorten mailbox names set sidebar_delim_chars="/" # Delete everything up to the last / character set sidebar_folder_indent # Indent folders whose names we've shortened set sidebar_indent_string=" " # Indent with two spaces
The screenshot below shows what the Sidebar would look like before and after shortening.
|fruit |fruit |fruit/apple | apple |fruit/banana | banana |fruit/cherry | cherry |water |water |water/sea | sea |water/sea/sicily | sicily |water/sea/archipelago | archipelago |water/sea/sibuyan | sibuyan |water/ocean | ocean |water/ocean/atlantic | atlantic |water/ocean/pacific | pacific |water/ocean/arctic | arctic
Sometimes, it will be necessary to add mailboxes, that you don't use, to fill in part of the tree. This will trade vertical space for horizontal space (but it looks good).
If you have a lot of mailboxes, sometimes it can be useful to
hide the ones you aren't using.
$sidebar_new_mail_only
tells Sidebar to only show
mailboxes that contain new, or flagged, email.
If you want some mailboxes to be always visible, then use the
sidebar_whitelist
command. It takes a list of
mailboxes as parameters.
set sidebar_new_mail_only # Only mailboxes with new/flagged email sidebar_whitelist fruit fruit/apple # Always display these two mailboxes
Here is a sample color scheme:
color sidebar_indicator default color17 # Dark blue background color sidebar_highlight white color238 # Grey background color sidebar_spoolfile yellow default # Yellow color sidebar_new green default # Green color sidebar_ordinary default default # Default colors color sidebar_flagged red default # Red color sidebar_divider color8 default # Dark grey
There is a priority order when coloring Sidebar mailboxes. e.g.
If a mailbox has new mail it will have the
sidebar_new
color, even if it also contains flagged
mails.
Table 2.3. Sidebar Color Priority
Priority | Color | Description |
---|---|---|
Highest |
sidebar_indicator
| Mailbox is open |
sidebar_highlight
| Mailbox is highlighted | |
sidebar_spoolfile
| Mailbox is the spoolfile (receives incoming mail) | |
sidebar_new
| Mailbox contains new mail | |
sidebar_flagged
| Mailbox contains flagged mail | |
Lowest |
sidebar_ordinary
| Mailbox does not match above |
If you haven't used Sidebar before, you can ignore this section.
Some of the Sidebar config has been changed to make its meaning clearer. These changes have been made since the previous Sidebar release: 2015-11-11.
Table 2.4. Config Changes
Old Name | New Name |
---|---|
$sidebar_delim
|
$sidebar_divider_char
|
$sidebar_folderindent
|
$sidebar_folder_indent
|
$sidebar_indentstr
|
$sidebar_indent_string
|
$sidebar_newmail_only
|
$sidebar_new_mail_only
|
$sidebar_shortpath
|
$sidebar_short_path
|
$sidebar_sort
|
$sidebar_sort_method
|
<sidebar-scroll-down>
|
<sidebar-page-down>
|
<sidebar-scroll-up>
|
<sidebar-page-up>
|
The help screen is meant to offer a quick help to the user. It lists the current configuration of key bindings and their associated commands including a short description, and currently unbound functions that still need to be associated with a key binding (or alternatively, they can be called via the NeoMutt command prompt).
The compose menu features a split screen containing the information which really matter before actually sending a message by mail: who gets the message as what (recipients and who gets what kind of copy). Additionally, users may set security options like deciding whether to sign, encrypt or sign and encrypt a message with/for what keys. Also, it's used to attach messages, to re-edit any attachment including the message itself.
The alias menu is used to help users finding the recipients of messages. For users who need to contact many people, there's no need to remember addresses or names completely because it allows for searching, too. The alias mechanism and thus the alias menu also features grouping several addresses by a shorter nickname, the actual alias, so that users don't have to select each single recipient manually.
As will be later discussed in detail, NeoMutt features a good and stable MIME implementation, that is, it supports sending and receiving messages of arbitrary MIME types. The attachment menu displays a message's structure in detail: what content parts are attached to which parent part (which gives a true tree structure), which type is of what type and what size. Single parts may saved, deleted or modified to offer great and easy access to message's internals.
The most important navigation keys common to line- or entry-based menus are shown in Table 2.5, “Most common navigation keys in entry-based menus”and in Table 2.6, “Most common navigation keys in page-based menus”for page-based menus.
Table 2.5. Most common navigation keys in entry-based menus
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
j or <Down> |
<next-entry>
| move to the next entry |
k or <Up> |
<previous-entry>
| move to the previous entry |
z or <PageDn> |
<page-down>
| go to the next page |
Z or <PageUp> |
<page-up>
| go to the previous page |
= or <Home> |
<first-entry>
| jump to the first entry |
* or <End> |
<last-entry>
| jump to the last entry |
q |
<quit>
| exit the current menu |
? |
<help>
| list all keybindings for the current menu |
Table 2.6. Most common navigation keys in page-based menus
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
J or <Return> |
<next-line>
| scroll down one line |
<Backspace> |
<previous-line>
| scroll up one line |
K, <Space> or <PageDn> |
<next-page>
| move to the next page |
- or <PageUp> |
<previous-page>
| move the previous page |
<Home> |
<top>
| move to the top |
<End> |
<bottom>
| move to the bottom |
NeoMutt has a built-in line editor for inputting text, e.g. email addresses or filenames. The keys used to manipulate text input are very similar to those of Emacs. See Table 2.7, “Most common line editor keys”for a full reference of available functions, their default key bindings, and short descriptions.
Table 2.7. Most common line editor keys
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
^A or <Home> |
<bol>
| move to the start of the line |
^B or <Left> |
<backward-char>
| move back one char |
Esc B |
<backward-word>
| move back one word |
^D or <Delete> |
<delete-char>
| delete the char under the cursor |
^E or <End> |
<eol>
| move to the end of the line |
^F or <Right> |
<forward-char>
| move forward one char |
Esc F |
<forward-word>
| move forward one word |
<Tab> |
<complete>
| complete filename, alias, or label |
^T |
<complete-query>
| complete address with query |
^K |
<kill-eol>
| delete to the end of the line |
Esc d |
<kill-eow>
| delete to the end of the word |
^W |
<kill-word>
| kill the word in front of the cursor |
^U |
<kill-line>
| delete entire line |
^V |
<quote-char>
| quote the next typed key |
<Up> |
<history-up>
| recall previous string from history |
<Down> |
<history-down>
| recall next string from history |
<BackSpace> |
<backspace>
| kill the char in front of the cursor |
Esc u |
<upcase-word>
| convert word to upper case |
Esc l |
<downcase-word>
| convert word to lower case |
Esc c |
<capitalize-word>
| capitalize the word |
^G | n/a | abort |
<Return> | n/a | finish editing |
You can remap the editor functions using the bind command. For example, to make the <Delete> key delete the character in front of the cursor rather than under, you could use:
bind editor <delete> backspace
NeoMutt maintains a history for the built-in editor. The number of
items is controlled by the
$history variable and can be made
persistent using an external file specified using
$history_file and
$save_history. You may cycle
through them at an editor prompt by using the
<history-up>
and/or
<history-down>
commands. NeoMutt will remember the
currently entered text as you cycle through history, and will wrap
around to the initial entry line.
NeoMutt maintains several distinct history lists, one for each of the following categories:
.neomuttrc
commands
addresses and aliases
shell commands
filenames
patterns
everything else
NeoMutt automatically filters out consecutively repeated items from the history. If $history_remove_dups is set, all repeated items are removed from the history. It also mimics the behavior of some shells by ignoring items starting with a space. The latter feature can be useful in macros to not clobber the history's valuable entries with unwanted entries.
Similar to many other mail clients, there are two modes in which mail is read in NeoMutt. The first is a list of messages in the mailbox, which is called the “index” menu in NeoMutt. The second mode is the display of the message contents. This is called the “pager.”
The next few sections describe the functions provided in each of these modes.
Common keys used to navigate through and manage messages in the index are shown in Table 2.8, “Most common message index keys”. How messages are presented in the index menu can be customized using the $index_format variable.
Table 2.8. Most common message index keys
Key | Description |
---|---|
c | change to a different mailbox |
Esc c | change to a folder in read-only mode |
C | copy the current message to another mailbox |
Esc C | decode a message and copy it to a folder |
Esc s | decode a message and save it to a folder |
D | delete messages matching a pattern |
d | delete the current message |
F | mark as important |
l | show messages matching a pattern |
N | mark message as new |
o | change the current sort method |
O | reverse sort the mailbox |
q | save changes and exit |
s | save-message |
T | tag messages matching a pattern |
t | toggle the tag on a message |
Esc t | toggle tag on entire message thread |
U | undelete messages matching a pattern |
u | undelete-message |
v | view-attachments |
x | abort changes and exit |
<Return> | display-message |
<Tab> | jump to the next new or unread message |
@ | show the author's full e-mail address |
$ | save changes to mailbox |
/ | search |
Esc / | search-reverse |
^L | clear and redraw the screen |
^T | untag messages matching a pattern |
In addition to who sent the message and the subject, a short
summary of the disposition of each message is printed beside the
message number. Zero or more of the
“flags” in
Table 2.9, “Message status flags”may appear, some of which can be
turned on or off using these functions:
<set-flag>
and
<clear-flag>
bound by default to
“w” and
“W” respectively.
Furthermore, the flags in Table 2.10, “Message recipient flags”reflect who the message is addressed to. They can be customized with the $to_chars variable.
Table 2.9. Message status flags
Flag | Description |
---|---|
D | message is deleted (is marked for deletion) |
d | message has attachments marked for deletion |
K | contains a PGP public key |
N | message is new |
O | message is old |
P | message is PGP encrypted |
r | message has been replied to |
S | message is signed, and the signature is successfully verified |
s | message is signed |
! | message is flagged |
* | message is tagged |
n | thread contains new messages (only if collapsed) |
o | thread contains old messages (only if collapsed) |
Table 2.10. Message recipient flags
Flag | Description |
---|---|
+ | message is to you and you only |
T | message is to you, but also to or CC'ed to others |
C | message is CC'ed to you |
F | message is from you |
L | message is sent to a subscribed mailing list |
By default, NeoMutt uses its built-in pager to display the contents
of messages (an external pager such as
less(1)
can be configured, see
$pager variable). The pager is very similar
to the Unix program
less(1)
though not nearly as featureful.
Table 2.11. Most common pager keys
Key | Description |
---|---|
<Return> | go down one line |
<Space> | display the next page (or next message if at the end of a message) |
- | go back to the previous page |
n | search for next match |
S | skip beyond quoted text |
T | toggle display of quoted text |
? | show keybindings |
/ | regular expression search |
Esc / | backward regular expression search |
\ | toggle highlighting of search matches |
^ | jump to the top of the message |
In addition to key bindings in
Table 2.11, “Most common pager keys”, many of the functions from the index
menu are also available in the pager, such as
<delete-message>
or
<copy-message>
(this is one advantage over
using an external pager to view messages).
Also, the internal pager supports a couple other advanced features. For one, it will accept and translate the “standard” nroff sequences for bold and underline. These sequences are a series of either the letter, backspace ( “^H”), the letter again for bold or the letter, backspace, “_” for denoting underline. NeoMutt will attempt to display these in bold and underline respectively if your terminal supports them. If not, you can use the bold and underline color objects to specify a color or mono attribute for them.
Additionally, the internal pager supports the ANSI escape sequences for character attributes. NeoMutt translates them into the correct color and character settings. The sequences NeoMutt supports are:
\e[ Ps; Ps;.. Ps;m
where Ps can be one of the codes shown in Table 2.12, “ANSI escape sequences”.
Table 2.12. ANSI escape sequences
Escape code | Description |
---|---|
0 | All attributes off |
1 | Bold on |
4 | Underline on |
5 | Blink on |
7 | Reverse video on |
3 <color> | Foreground color is <color>(see Table 2.13, “Color sequences”) |
4 <color> | Background color is <color>(see Table 2.13, “Color sequences”) |
NeoMutt uses these attributes for handling
text/enriched
messages, and they can also be used by
an external
autoview script for highlighting
purposes.
If you change the colors for your display, for example by changing the color associated with color2 for your xterm, then that color will be used instead of green.
Note that the search commands in the pager take regular expressions, which are not quite the same as the more complex patterns used by the search command in the index. This is because patterns are used to select messages by criteria whereas the pager already displays a selected message.
So-called “threads” provide a hierarchy of messages where replies are linked to their parent message(s). This organizational form is extremely useful in mailing lists where different parts of the discussion diverge. NeoMutt displays threads as a tree structure.
In NeoMutt, when a mailbox is sorted by threads, there are a few additional functions available in the index and pager modes as shown in Table 2.14, “Most common thread mode keys”.
Table 2.14. Most common thread mode keys
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
^D |
<delete-thread>
| delete all messages in the current thread |
^U |
<undelete-thread>
| undelete all messages in the current thread |
^N |
<next-thread>
| jump to the start of the next thread |
^P |
<previous-thread>
| jump to the start of the previous thread |
^R |
<read-thread>
| mark the current thread as read |
Esc d |
<delete-subthread>
| delete all messages in the current subthread |
Esc u |
<undelete-subthread>
| undelete all messages in the current subthread |
Esc n |
<next-subthread>
| jump to the start of the next subthread |
Esc p |
<previous-subthread>
| jump to the start of the previous subthread |
Esc r |
<read-subthread>
| mark the current subthread as read |
Esc t |
<tag-thread>
| toggle the tag on the current thread |
Esc v |
<collapse-thread>
| toggle collapse for the current thread |
Esc V |
<collapse-all>
| toggle collapse for all threads |
P |
<parent-message>
| jump to parent message in thread |
Collapsing a thread displays only the first message in the thread
and hides the others. This is useful when threads contain so many
messages that you can only see a handful of threads on the screen. See
%M in
$index_format. For example, you
could use
“%?M?(#%03M)&(%4l)?”in
$index_format to optionally display
the number of hidden messages if the thread is collapsed. The
%?<char>?<if-part>&<else-part>?
syntax
is explained in detail in
format string
conditionals.
Technically, every reply should contain a list of its parent messages in the thread tree, but not all do. In these cases, NeoMutt groups them by subject which can be controlled using the $strict_threads variable.
In addition, the index and pager menus have these interesting functions:
<create-alias>
(default: a)Creates a new alias based upon the current message (or prompts for a new one). Once editing is complete, an alias command is added to the file specified by the $alias_file variable for future use
NeoMutt does not read the $alias_file upon startup so you must explicitly source the file.
<check-traditional-pgp>
(default: Esc P)This function will search the current message for content
signed or encrypted with PGP the
“traditional” way, that is, without proper MIME
tagging. Technically, this function will temporarily change the
MIME content types of the body parts containing PGP data; this is
similar to the
<edit-type>
function's effect.
<edit-raw-message>
This command (available in the index and pager) allows you to edit the raw current message as it's present in the mail folder. After you have finished editing, the changed message will be appended to the current folder, and the original message will be marked for deletion; if the message is unchanged it won't be replaced.
<edit>
is a
synonym of this for backwards compatibility.
See also
<edit-or-view-raw-message>
,
<view-raw-message>
.
<edit>
Alias of
<edit-raw-message>
for backwards compatibility.
<edit-or-view-raw-message>
(default: e)This command (available in the index and pager) is the same
as
<edit-raw-message>
if the mailbox is writable, otherwise it the same as
<view-raw-message>
.
<edit-type>
(default: ^E on the attachment menu, and
in the pager and index menus; ^T on the compose menu)This command is used to temporarily edit an attachment's content type to fix, for instance, bogus character set parameters. When invoked from the index or from the pager, you'll have the opportunity to edit the top-level attachment's content type. On the attachment menu, you can change any attachment's content type. These changes are not persistent, and get lost upon changing folders.
Note that this command is also available on the compose menu. There, it's used to fine-tune the properties of attachments you are going to send.
<enter-command>
(default:
“:”)This command is used to execute any command you would normally put in a configuration file. A common use is to check the settings of variables, or in conjunction with macros to change settings on the fly.
<extract-keys>
(default: ^K)This command extracts PGP public keys from the current or tagged message(s) and adds them to your PGP public key ring.
<forget-passphrase>
(default: ^F)This command wipes the passphrase(s) from memory. It is useful, if you misspelled the passphrase.
<list-reply>
(default: L)Reply to the current or tagged message(s) by extracting any
addresses which match the regular expressions given by the
lists or
subscribecommands, but also honor any
Mail-Followup-To
header(s) if the
$honor_followup_to configuration variable is set. In
addition, the
List-Post
header field is examined for
mailto:
URLs specifying a mailing list address.
Using this when replying to messages posted to mailing lists
helps avoid duplicate copies being sent to the author of the
message you are replying to.
<pipe-message>
(default: |)Asks for an external Unix command and pipes the current or tagged message(s) to it. The variables $pipe_decode, $pipe_split, $pipe_sep and $wait_key control the exact behavior of this function.
<resend-message>
(default: Esc e)NeoMutt takes the current message as a template for a new message. This function is best described as "recall from arbitrary folders". It can conveniently be used to forward MIME messages while preserving the original mail structure. Note that the amount of headers included here depends on the value of the $weed variable.
This function is also available from the attachment menu.
You can use this to easily resend a message which was included
with a bounce message as a
message/rfc822
body part.
<shell-escape>
(default: !)Asks for an external Unix command and executes it. The $wait_key can be used to control whether NeoMutt will wait for a key to be pressed when the command returns (presumably to let the user read the output of the command), based on the return status of the named command. If no command is given, an interactive shell is executed.
<toggle-quoted>
(default: T)The pager uses the $quote_regexp variable to detect quoted text when displaying the body of the message. This function toggles the display of the quoted material in the message. It is particularly useful when being interested in just the response and there is a large amount of quoted text in the way.
<view-raw-message>
This command (available in the index and pager) opens the
raw message read-only in an editor. This command does not allow
editing the message, use
<edit-raw-message>
for this.
See also
<edit-raw-message>
,
<edit-or-view-raw-message>
.
<skip-quoted>
(default: S)This function will go to the next line of non-quoted text which comes after a line of quoted text in the internal pager.
The bindings shown in Table 2.15, “Most common mail sending keys”are available in the index and pager to start a new message.
Table 2.15. Most common mail sending keys
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
m |
<compose>
| compose a new message |
r |
<reply>
| reply to sender |
g |
<group-reply>
| reply to all recipients |
L |
<list-reply>
| reply to mailing list address |
f |
<forward>
| forward message |
b |
<bounce>
| bounce (remail) message |
Esc k |
<mail-key>
| mail a PGP public key to someone |
Bouncing a message sends the message as-is to the recipient you specify. Forwarding a message allows you to add comments or modify the message you are forwarding. These items are discussed in greater detail in the next section “ Forwarding and Bouncing Mail.”
NeoMutt will then enter the
compose menu and prompt you for the recipients to
place on the
“To:”header field when you hit
m
to start a new message. Next, it will ask you for
the
“Subject:”field for the message, providing a default if
you are replying to or forwarding a message. You again have the chance
to adjust recipients, subject, and security settings right before
actually sending the message. See also
$askcc,
$askbcc,
$autoedit,
$bounce,
$fast_reply, and
$include for changing how and if NeoMutt
asks these questions.
When replying, NeoMutt fills these fields with proper values depending on the reply type. The types of replying supported are:
Reply to the author directly.
Reply to the author as well to all recipients except you; this consults alternates .
Reply to all mailing list addresses found, either specified via configuration or auto-detected. See Section 12, “Mailing Lists”for details.
After getting recipients for new messages, forwards or replies, NeoMutt will then automatically start your $editor on the message body. If the $edit_headers variable is set, the headers will be at the top of the message in your editor; the message body should start on a new line after the existing blank line at the end of headers. Any messages you are replying to will be added in sort order to the message, with appropriate $attribution, $indent_string and $post_indent_string. When forwarding a message, if the $mime_forward variable is unset, a copy of the forwarded message will be included. If you have specified a $signature, it will be appended to the message.
Once you have finished editing the body of your mail message, you are returned to the compose menu providing the functions shown in Table 2.16, “Most common compose menu keys”to modify, send or postpone the message.
Table 2.16. Most common compose menu keys
Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
a |
<attach-file>
| attach a file |
A |
<attach-message>
| attach message(s) to the message |
Esc k |
<attach-key>
| attach a PGP public key |
d |
<edit-description>
| edit description on attachment |
D |
<detach-file>
| detach a file |
t |
<edit-to>
| edit the To field |
Esc f |
<edit-from>
| edit the From field |
r |
<edit-reply-to>
| edit the Reply-To field |
c |
<edit-cc>
| edit the Cc field |
b |
<edit-bcc>
| edit the Bcc field |
y |
<send-message>
| send the message |
s |
<edit-subject>
| edit the Subject |
S |
<smime-menu>
| select S/MIME options |
f |
<edit-fcc>
| specify an “Fcc” mailbox |
p |
<pgp-menu>
| select PGP options |
P |
<postpone-message>
| postpone this message until later |
q |
<quit>
| quit (abort) sending the message |
w |
<write-fcc>
| write the message to a folder |
i |
<ispell>
| check spelling (if available on your system) |
^F |
<forget-passphrase>
| wipe passphrase(s) from memory |
The compose menu is also used to edit the attachments for a
message which can be either files or other messages. The
<attach-message>
function to will prompt you
for a folder to attach messages from. You can now tag messages in that
folder and they will be attached to the message you are sending.
Note that certain operations like composing a new mail, replying, forwarding, etc. are not permitted when you are in that folder. The %r in $status_format will change to a “A” to indicate that you are in attach-message mode.
When editing the header because of $edit_headers being set, there are a several pseudo headers available which will not be included in sent messages but trigger special NeoMutt behavior.
If you specify
Fcc:
filename
as a header, NeoMutt will pick up
filename just as if you had used the
<edit-fcc>
function in the
compose menu. It can later be changed from the
compose menu.
You can also attach files to your message by specifying
Attach:
filename[
description]
where filename is the file to attach and description is an optional string to use as the description of the attached file. Spaces in filenames have to be escaped using backslash ( “\”). The file can be removed as well as more added from the compose menu.
If you want to use PGP, you can specify
Pgp:
[
E
|
S
|
S
<id>]
“E” selects encryption, “S” selects signing and “S<id>”selects signing with the given key, setting $pgp_sign_as permanently. The selection can later be changed in the compose menu.
When replying to messages, the In-Reply-To:header contains the Message-Id of the message(s) you reply to. If you remove or modify its value, NeoMutt will not generate a References:field, which allows you to create a new message thread, for example to create a new message to a mailing list without having to enter the mailing list's address.
If you intend to start a new thread by replying, please make really sure you remove the In-Reply-To:header in your editor. Otherwise, though you'll produce a technically valid reply, some netiquette guardians will be annoyed by this so-called “thread hijacking”.
If you have told NeoMutt to PGP or S/MIME encrypt a message, it will guide you through a key selection process when you try to send the message. NeoMutt will not ask you any questions about keys which have a certified user ID matching one of the message recipients' mail addresses. However, there may be situations in which there are several keys, weakly certified user ID fields, or where no matching keys can be found.
In these cases, you are dropped into a menu with a list of keys
from which you can select one. When you quit this menu, or NeoMutt can't
find any matching keys, you are prompted for a user ID. You can, as
usually, abort this prompt using
^G
. When you do so, NeoMutt will return to the compose
screen.
Once you have successfully finished the key selection, the message will be encrypted using the selected public keys when sent out.
Most fields of the entries in the key selection menu (see also $pgp_entry_format) have obvious meanings. But some explanations on the capabilities, flags, and validity fields are in order.
The flags sequence ( “%f”) will expand to one of the flags in Table 2.17, “PGP key menu flags”.
Table 2.17. PGP key menu flags
Flag | Description |
---|---|
R | The key has been revoked and can't be used. |
X | The key is expired and can't be used. |
d | You have marked the key as disabled. |
c | There are unknown critical self-signature packets. |
The capabilities field ( “%c”) expands to a two-character sequence representing a key's capabilities. The first character gives the key's encryption capabilities: A minus sign ( “-”) means that the key cannot be used for encryption. A dot ( “.”) means that it's marked as a signature key in one of the user IDs, but may also be used for encryption. The letter “e” indicates that this key can be used for encryption.
The second character indicates the key's signing capabilities. Once again, a “-”implies “not for signing”, “.”implies that the key is marked as an encryption key in one of the user-ids, and “s” denotes a key which can be used for signing.
Finally, the validity field ( “%t”) indicates how well-certified a user-id is. A question mark ( “?”) indicates undefined validity, a minus character ( “-”) marks an untrusted association, a space character means a partially trusted association, and a plus character ( “+”) indicates complete validity.
format=flowed
-style messages (or
f=f
for short) are
text/plain
messages that consist of paragraphs
which a receiver's mail client may reformat to its own needs which
mostly means to customize line lengths regardless of what the sender
sent. Technically this is achieved by letting lines of a
“flowable” paragraph end in spaces except for the last
line.
While for text-mode clients like NeoMutt it's the best way to assume only a standard 80x25 character cell terminal, it may be desired to let the receiver decide completely how to view a message.
NeoMutt only supports setting the required
format=flowed
MIME parameter on outgoing messages
if the
$text_flowed variable is set,
specifically it does not add the trailing spaces.
After editing the initial message text and before entering the
compose menu, NeoMutt properly space-stuffs the message.
Space-stuffing is required by RFC3676 defining
format=flowed
and means to prepend a space
to:
all lines starting with a space
lines starting with the word
“
From
”followed by space
all lines starting with
“
>
”which is not intended to be a quote character
NeoMutt only supports space-stuffing for the first two types of
lines but not for the third: It is impossible to safely detect
whether a leading
>
character starts a quote or not.
Furthermore, NeoMutt only applies space-stuffing
once after the initial edit is finished.
All leading spaces are to be removed by receiving clients to restore the original message prior to further processing.
As NeoMutt provides no additional features to compose
f=f
messages, it's completely up to the user and
his editor to produce proper messages. Please consider your editor's
documentation if you intend to send
f=f
messages.
Please note that when editing messages from the compose menu several times before really sending a mail, it's up to the user to ensure that the message is properly space-stuffed.
For example,
vim provides the
w
flag for its
formatoptions
setting to assist in creating
f=f
messages, see
:help fo-table
for details.
NeoMutt has some support for reformatting when viewing and
replying to
format=flowed
messages. In order to take advantage
of these,
$reflow_text must be set.
Paragraphs are automatically reflowed and wrapped at a width specified by $reflow_wrap.
In its original format, the quoting style of
format=flowed
messages can be difficult to
read, and doesn't intermix well with non-flowed replies. Setting
$reflow_space_quotes adds spaces after each level of
quoting when in the pager and replying in a non-flowed format
(i.e. with
$text_flowed unset).
If $reflow_space_quotes is unset, NeoMutt will still add one trailing space after all the quotes in the pager (but not when replying).
Bouncing and forwarding let you send an existing message to
recipients that you specify. Bouncing a message sends a verbatim copy of
a message to alternative addresses as if they were the message's original
recipients specified in the Bcc header. Forwarding a message, on the
other hand, allows you to modify the message before it is resent (for
example, by adding your own comments). Bouncing is done using the
<bounce>
function and forwarding using the
<forward>
function bound to
“b” and
“f” respectively.
Forwarding can be done by including the original message in the new message's body (surrounded by indicating lines) or including it as a MIME attachment, depending on the value of the $mime_forward variable. Decoding of attachments, like in the pager, can be controlled by the $forward_decode and $mime_forward_decode variables, respectively. The desired forwarding format may depend on the content, therefore $mime_forward is a quadoption which, for example, can be set to “ask-no”.
The inclusion of headers is controlled by the current setting of the $weed variable, unless $mime_forward is set.
By default a forwarded message does not reference the messages it contains. When $forward_references is set, a forwarded message includes the “In-Reply-To:”and “References:”headers, just like a reply would. Hence the forwarded message becomes part of the original thread instead of starting a new one.
Editing the message to forward follows the same procedure as sending or replying to a message does.
At times it is desirable to delay sending a message that you have
already begun to compose. When the
<postpone-message>
function is used in the
compose menu, the body of your message and
attachments are stored in the mailbox specified by the
$postponed variable. This means that you
can recall the message even if you exit NeoMutt and then restart it at a
later time.
Once a message is postponed, there are several ways to resume it. From the command line you can use the “-p” option, or if you compose a new message from the index or pager you will be prompted if postponed messages exist. If multiple messages are currently postponed, the postponed menu will pop up and you can select which message you would like to resume.
If you postpone a reply to a message, the reply setting of the message is only updated when you actually finish the message and send it. Also, you must be in the same folder with the message you replied to for the status of the message to be updated.
See also the $postpone quad-option.
Table of Contents
When NeoMutt starts up it looks for two configuration files -- one “system” file and one “user” file.
NeoMutt searches for several different file names when looking for config. It looks for NeoMutt config files before Mutt config files and versioned config before plain config. For example:
This allows the user to create separate NeoMutt and Mutt config files on the same system.
NeoMutt will search for a system config file in a
neomutt
directory in several places. First it searches
the locations specified in the
XDG_CONFIG_DIRS
environment variable, which defaults
to
/etc/xdg
. Next, it looks in
/etc
. Finally, it tries
/usr/share
.
The system config file will not be read if the “-n” option is used on the command line.
NeoMutt will read just one file, the first file it finds, from the list below.
Table 3.2. NeoMutt system config file locations
File Location | Notes |
---|---|
/etc/xdg/neomutt/neomuttrc | |
/etc/xdg/neomutt/Muttrc | Note the case of the filename |
/etc/neomuttrc | |
/etc/Muttrc | Note the case of the filename |
/usr/share/neomutt/neomuttrc | |
/usr/share/neomutt/Muttrc | Note the case of the filename |
NeoMutt will search for a user config file in several places. First
it looks in the directory specified in the
XDG_CONFIG_HOME
environment variable, which defaults
to
~/.config/neomutt
. Next, it looks in
~
(your home directory). Finally, it tries
~/.neomutt
.
You may specify your own location for the user config file using the “-F” option on the command line.
NeoMutt will read just one file, the first file it finds, from the list below.
Table 3.3. NeoMutt user config file locations
File Location |
---|
~/.config/neomutt/neomuttrc |
~/.config/neomutt/muttrc |
~/.config/mutt/neomuttrc |
~/.config/mutt/muttrc |
~/.neomutt/neomuttrc |
~/.neomutt/muttrc |
~/.mutt/neomuttrc |
~/.mutt/muttrc |
~/.neomuttrc |
~/.muttrc |
An initialization file consists of a series of commands. Each line of the file may contain one or more commands. When multiple commands are used, they must be separated by a semicolon ( “;”).
The hash mark, or pound sign ( “#”), is used as a “comment” character. You can use it to annotate your initialization file. All text after the comment character to the end of the line is ignored.
Example 3.2. Commenting configuration files
my_hdr X-Disclaimer: Why are you listening to me?
# This is a comment
Single quotes ( “'”) and double quotes ( “"”) can be used to quote strings which contain spaces or other special characters. The difference between the two types of quotes is similar to that of many popular shell programs, namely that a single quote is used to specify a literal string (one that is not interpreted for shell variables or quoting with a backslash [see next paragraph]), while double quotes indicate a string for which should be evaluated. For example, backticks are evaluated inside of double quotes, but not for single quotes.
“\”quotes the next character, just as in shells such as bash and zsh. For example, if want to put quotes “"”inside of a string, you can use “\”to force the next character to be a literal instead of interpreted character.
“\\”means to insert a literal “\”into the line. “\n” and “\r” have their usual C meanings of linefeed and carriage-return, respectively.
A “\”at the end of a line can be used to split commands over multiple lines as it “escapes” the line end, provided that the split points don't appear in the middle of command names. Lines are first concatenated before interpretation so that a multi-line can be commented by commenting out the first line only.
Example 3.4. Splitting long configuration commands over several lines
set status_format="some very \ long value split \ over several lines"
It is also possible to substitute the output of a Unix command in an initialization file. This is accomplished by enclosing the command in backticks (``). In Example 3.5, “Using external command's output in configuration files”, the output of the Unix command “uname -a” will be substituted before the line is parsed. Since initialization files are line oriented, only the first line of output from the Unix command will be substituted.
Example 3.5. Using external command's output in configuration files
my_hdr X-Operating-System: `uname -a`
Both environment variables and NeoMutt variables can be accessed by prepending “$”to the name of the variable. For example,
will cause NeoMutt to save outgoing messages to a folder named
“sent_on_kremvax” if the environment variable
$HOSTNAME
is set to
“kremvax.”(See
$record for details.)
NeoMutt expands the variable when it is assigned, not when it is used. If the value of a variable on the right-hand side of an assignment changes after the assignment, the variable on the left-hand side will not be affected.
The commands understood by NeoMutt are explained in the next paragraphs. For a complete list, see the command reference.
All configuration files are expected to be in the current locale as specified by the $charset variable which doesn't have a default value since it's determined by NeoMutt at startup. If a configuration file is not encoded in the same character set the $config_charset variable should be used: all lines starting with the next are recoded from $config_charset to $charset.
This mechanism should be avoided if possible as it has the following implications:
These variables should be set early in a configuration file with $charset preceding $config_charset so NeoMutt knows what character set to convert to.
If $config_charset is set, it should be set in each configuration file because the value is global and not per configuration file.
Because NeoMutt first recodes a line before it attempts to parse it, a conversion introducing question marks or other characters as part of errors (unconvertable characters, transliteration) may introduce syntax errors or silently change the meaning of certain tokens (e.g. inserting question marks into regular expressions).
Usage:
group
[
-group
name
...] {
-rx
expr
... |
-addr
expr
... }ungroup
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
-rx
expr
... |
-addr
expr
... }
NeoMutt supports grouping addresses logically into named groups. An
address or address pattern can appear in several groups at the same time.
These groups can be used in
patterns(for searching, limiting and
tagging) and in hooks by using group patterns. This can be useful to
classify mail and take certain actions depending on in what groups the
message is. For example, the NeoMutt user's mailing list would fit into the
categories
“mailing list” and
“NeoMutt-related”. Using
send-hook
, the sender can be set to a dedicated one for writing mailing
list messages, and the signature could be set to a NeoMutt-related one for
writing to a NeoMutt list — for other lists, the list sender setting still
applies but a different signature can be selected. Or, given a group only
containing recipients known to accept encrypted mail,
“auto-encryption” can be achieved easily.
The
group command is used to directly add either addresses
or regular expressions to the specified group or groups. The different
categories of arguments to the
group command can be in any order. The flags
-rx
and
-addr
specify what the following strings (that cannot
begin with a hyphen) should be interpreted as: either a regular
expression or an email address, respectively.
These address groups can also be created implicitly by the
alias
,
lists
,
subscribe
and
alternates
commands by specifying the optional
-group
option. For example,
alternates -group me address1 address2 alternates -group me -group work address3
would create a group named “me” which contains all your addresses and a group named “work” which contains only your work address address3. Besides many other possibilities, this could be used to automatically mark your own messages in a mailing list folder as read or use a special signature for work-related messages.
The
ungroup command is used to remove addresses or regular
expressions from the specified group or groups. The syntax is similar to
the
group command, however the special character
*
can be used to empty a group of all of its contents.
As soon as a group gets empty because all addresses and regular
expressions have been removed, it'll internally be removed, too (i.e.
there cannot be an empty group). When removing regular expressions from a
group, the pattern must be specified exactly as given to the
group command or
-group
argument.
Usage:
alias
[
-group
name
...]
key
address
[
address
...]unalias
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
key
... }
It's usually very cumbersome to remember or type out the address of someone you are communicating with. NeoMutt allows you to create “aliases” which map a short string to a full address.
If you want to create an alias for more than one address, you must separate the addresses with a comma ( “,”).
The optional
-group
argument to
alias causes the aliased address(es) to be added to the
named
group.
To remove an alias or aliases ( “*”means all aliases):
alias muttdude me@cs.hmc.edu (Michael Elkins) alias theguys manny, moe, jack
Unlike other mailers, NeoMutt doesn't require aliases to be defined in
a special file. The
alias command can appear anywhere in a configuration
file, as long as this file is
sourced. Consequently, you can have multiple
alias files, or you can have all aliases defined in your
.neomuttrc
.
On the other hand, the
<create-alias>
function can use only one file, the one pointed to by the
$alias_file variable (which is
~/.neomuttrc
by default). This file is not special either,
in the sense that NeoMutt will happily append aliases to any file, but in
order for the new aliases to take effect you need to explicitly
source
this file too.
Example 3.7. Configuring external alias files
source /usr/local/share/NeoMutt.aliases source ~/.mail_aliases set alias_file=~/.mail_aliases
To use aliases, you merely use the alias at any place in NeoMutt where NeoMutt prompts for addresses, such as the To:or Cc:prompt. You can also enter aliases in your editor at the appropriate headers if you have the $edit_headers variable set.
In addition, at the various address prompts, you can use the tab character to expand a partial alias to the full alias. If there are multiple matches, NeoMutt will bring up a menu with the matching aliases. In order to be presented with the full list of aliases, you must hit tab without a partial alias, such as at the beginning of the prompt or after a comma denoting multiple addresses.
In the alias menu, you can select as many aliases as you want with
the
select-entry
key (default: <Return>), and use the
exit key (default: q) to return to the address
prompt.
Usage:
bind
map
key
function
This command allows you to change the default key bindings (operation invoked when pressing a key).
map specifies in which menu the binding belongs. Multiple maps may be specified by separating them with commas (no additional whitespace is allowed). The currently defined maps are:
This is not a real menu, but is used as a fallback for all of the other menus except for the pager and editor modes. If a key is not defined in another menu, NeoMutt will look for a binding to use in this menu. This allows you to bind a key to a certain function in multiple menus instead of having multiple bind statements to accomplish the same task.
The alias menu is the list of your personal aliases as
defined in your
.neomuttrc
. It is the mapping from a short alias
name to the full email address(es) of the recipient(s).
The attachment menu is used to access the attachments on received messages.
The browser is used for both browsing the local directory structure, and for listing all of your incoming mailboxes.
The editor is used to allow the user to enter a single line
of text, such as the
To or
Subject prompts in the
compose
menu.
The index is the list of messages contained in a mailbox.
The compose menu is the screen used when sending a new message.
The pager is the mode used to display message/attachment data, and help listings.
The pgp menu is used to select the OpenPGP keys used to encrypt outgoing messages.
The smime menu is used to select the OpenSSL certificates used to encrypt outgoing messages.
The postpone menu is similar to the index menu, except is used when recalling a message the user was composing, but saved until later.
The query menu is the browser for results returned by $query_command.
The mixmaster screen is used to select remailer options for outgoing messages (if NeoMutt is compiled with Mixmaster support).
key is the key (or key sequence) you wish to bind. To specify a control character, use the sequence \Cx, where x is the letter of the control character (for example, to specify control-A use “\Ca”). Note that the case of x as well as \C is ignored, so that \CA, \Ca, \cA and \ca are all equivalent. An alternative form is to specify the key as a three digit octal number prefixed with a “\”(for example \177 is equivalent to \c?). In addition, key may be a symbolic name as shown in Table 3.4, “Symbolic key names”.
Table 3.4. Symbolic key names
Symbolic name | Meaning |
---|---|
\t | tab |
<tab> | tab |
<backtab> | backtab / shift-tab |
\r | carriage return |
\n | newline |
\e | escape/alt |
<esc> | escape/alt |
<up> | up arrow |
<down> | down arrow |
<left> | left arrow |
<right> | right arrow |
<pageup> | Page Up |
<pagedown> | Page Down |
<backspace> | Backspace |
<delete> | Delete |
<insert> | Insert |
<enter> | Enter |
<return> | Return |
<home> | Home |
<end> | End |
<space> | Space bar |
<f1> | function key 1 |
<f10> | function key 10 |
The
<what-key>
function can be used to explore
keycode and symbolic names for other keys on your keyboard. Executing
this function will display information about each key pressed, until
terminated by
^G
.
key does not need to be enclosed in quotes unless it contains a space ( “ ”) or semi-colon ( “;”).
function specifies which action to take when key is pressed. For a complete list of functions, see the reference. Note that the bind expects function to be specified without angle brackets.
The special function
<noop>
unbinds the specified key sequence.
Due to a limitation of NeoMutt, creating key bindings, or macros, will overwrite existing mappings with similar, shorter, names.
bind index g group-reply bind index gg first-entry
In this example, the g
binding will be
overwritten and cannot be used. Newer versions of NeoMutt will warn the
user about this.
To avoid warnings on startup, first set the shorter binding to
noop
(no operation).
bind index g noop bind index gg first-entry
Usage:
The charset-hook command defines an alias for a character set. This is useful to properly display messages which are tagged with a character set name not known to NeoMutt.
The iconv-hook command defines a system-specific name for a character set. This is helpful when your systems character conversion library insists on using strange, system-specific names for character sets.
Usage:
folder-hook
[!]regex
command
It is often desirable to change settings based on which mailbox you
are reading. The
folder-hook command provides a method by which you can
execute any configuration command.
regex is a regular expression specifying in which
mailboxes to execute
command before loading. If a mailbox matches multiple
folder-hooks, they are executed in the order given in
the
.neomuttrc
.
The regex parameter has mailbox shortcut expansion performed on the first character. See Mailbox Matching in Hooksfor more details.
If you use the “!”shortcut for $spoolfile at the beginning of the pattern, you must place it inside of double or single quotes in order to distinguish it from the logical not operator for the expression.
Settings are not restored when you leave the mailbox. For example, a command action to perform is to change the sorting method based upon the mailbox being read:
folder-hook work "set sort=threads"
However, the sorting method is not restored to its previous value when reading a different mailbox. To specify a default command, use the pattern “.”before other folder-hooks adjusting a value on a per-folder basis because folder-hooks are evaluated in the order given in the configuration file.
The keyboard buffer will not be processed until after all hooks are run; multiple push or exec commands will end up being processed in reverse order.
The following example will set the
sort variable to
date-sent
for all folders but to
threads
for all folders containing
“work” in their name.
Example 3.8. Setting sort method based on mailbox name
folder-hook . "set sort=date-sent" folder-hook work "set sort=threads"
Usage:
macro
menu
key
sequence
[
description
]
Macros are useful when you would like a single key to perform a series of actions. When you press key in menu menu, NeoMutt will behave as if you had typed sequence. So if you have a common sequence of commands you type, you can create a macro to execute those commands with a single key or fewer keys.
menu is the map which the macro will be bound in. Multiple maps may be specified by separating multiple menu arguments by commas. Whitespace may not be used in between the menu arguments and the commas separating them.
key and sequence are expanded by the same rules as the key bindings with some additions. The first is that control characters in sequence can also be specified as ^x. In order to get a caret ( “^”) you need to use ^^. Secondly, to specify a certain key such as up or to invoke a function directly, you can use the format <key name>and <function name>. For a listing of key names see the section on key bindings. Functions are listed in the reference.
The advantage with using function names directly is that the macros will work regardless of the current key bindings, so they are not dependent on the user having particular key definitions. This makes them more robust and portable, and also facilitates defining of macros in files used by more than one user (e.g., the system neomuttrc).
Optionally you can specify a descriptive text after sequence, which is shown in the help screens if they contain a description.
Macro definitions (if any) listed in the help screen(s), are silently truncated at the screen width, and are not wrapped.
Usage:
color
object
foreground
background
color
{
header
|
body
}
foreground
background
regex
color
index-object
foreground
background
pattern
color
compose
composeobject
foreground
background
uncolor
{
index-object
|
header
|
body
} {
*
|
pattern
... }
If your terminal supports color, you can spice up NeoMutt by creating your own color scheme. To define the color of an object (type of information), you must specify both a foreground color and a background color (it is not possible to only specify one or the other).
header and body match regex in the header/body of a message, index-object can match pattern(see Section 3, “Patterns: Searching, Limiting and Tagging”) in the message index. Note that IMAP server-side searches (=b, =B, =h) are not supported for color index patterns.
When $header_color_partial is unset (the default), a header matched by regex will have color applied to the entire header. When set, color is applied only to the exact text matched by regex.
object can be one of:
attachment
bold (highlighting bold patterns in the body of messages)
error (error messages printed by NeoMutt)
hdrdefault (default color of the message header in the pager)
index_author (color of the author name in the index, uses pattern)
index_collapsed (the number of messages in a collapsed thread in the index)
index_date (color of the date field in the index)
index_flags (color of the message flags in the index)
index_label (color of the message label in the index)
index_number (color of the message number in the index)
index_size (color of the message size and line number in the index)
index_subject (color of the subject in the index, uses pattern)
indicator (arrow or bar used to indicate the current item in a menu)
markers (the “+”markers at the beginning of wrapped lines in the pager)
message (informational messages)
normal
progress(visual progress bar)
prompt
quoted (text matching $quote_regexp in the body of a message)
quoted1, quoted2, ..., quoted N(higher levels of quoting)
search (highlighting of words in the pager)
signature
status (mode lines used to display info about the mailbox or message)
tilde (the “~”used to pad blank lines in the pager)
tree (thread tree drawn in the message index and attachment menu)
underline (highlighting underlined patterns in the body of messages)
composeobject can be one of:
header
security_encrypt
security_sign
security_both
security_none
index-object can be one of the following:
index (default highlighting of the entire index line, uses pattern)
index_date (the date field)
index_flags (the message flags, %S %Z, uses pattern)
index_number (the message number, %C)
index_collapsed (the number of messages in a collapsed thread, %M)
index_author (the author name, %A %a %F %L %n, uses pattern)
index_subject (the subject, %s, uses pattern)
index_size (the message size, %c %l)
index_label (the message label, %y %Y)
index_tags (the transformed message tags, %g)
index_tag (an individual message tag, %G, uses pattern / tag name)
foreground and background can be one of the following:
white
black
green
magenta
blue
cyan
yellow
red
default
color x
foreground can optionally be prefixed with the
keyword
bright
to make the foreground color boldfaced (e.g.,
brightred
).
If your terminal supports it, the special keyword
default can be used as a transparent color. The value
brightdefault is also valid. If NeoMutt is linked
against the
S-Lang library, you also need to set the
$COLORFGBG
environment variable to the default colors
of your terminal for this to work; for example (for Bourne-like
shells):
set COLORFGBG="green;black" export COLORFGBG
The S-Lang library requires you to use the lightgray and brown keywords instead of white and yellow when setting this variable.
The uncolor command can be applied to the index, header and body objects only. It removes entries from the list. You must specify the same pattern specified in the color command for it to be removed. The pattern “*”is a special token which means to clear the color list of all entries.
NeoMutt also recognizes the keywords color0, color1, ..., color N-1( N being the number of colors supported by your terminal). This is useful when you remap the colors for your display (for example by changing the color associated with color2 for your xterm), since color names may then lose their normal meaning.
If your terminal does not support color, it is still possible change the video attributes through the use of the “mono” command. Usage:
mono
object
attribute
mono
{
header
|
body
}
attribute
regex
mono
index
attribute
pattern
unmono
{
index-object
|
header
|
body
} {
*
|
pattern
... }
For object, see the color command. attribute can be one of the following:
none
bold
underline
reverse
standout
When displaying a message in the pager, NeoMutt folds long header lines at $wrap columns. Though there're precise rules about where to break and how, NeoMutt always folds headers using a tab for readability. (Note that the sending side is not affected by this, NeoMutt tries to implement standards compliant folding.)
Usage:
ignore
pattern
[
pattern
...]unignore
{
*
|
pattern
... }
Messages often have many header fields added by automatic processing systems, or which may not seem useful to display on the screen. This command allows you to specify header fields which you don't normally want to see in the pager.
You do not need to specify the full header field name. For example, “ignore content-”will ignore all header fields that begin with the pattern “content-”. “ignore *”will ignore all headers.
To remove a previously added token from the list, use the “unignore” command. The “unignore” command will make NeoMutt display headers with the given pattern. For example, if you do “ignore x-”it is possible to “unignore x-mailer”.
“unignore *”will remove all tokens from the ignore list.
Example 3.9. Header weeding
# Sven's draconian header weeding
ignore *
unignore from date subject to cc
unignore organization organisation x-mailer: x-newsreader: x-mailing-list:
unignore posted-to:
Usage:
hdr_order
header
[
header
...]unhdr_order
{
*
|
header
... }
With the hdr_order command you can specify an order in which NeoMutt will attempt to present these headers to you when viewing messages.
“ unhdr_order*”will clear all previous headers from the order list, thus removing the header order effects set by the system-wide startup file.
Usage:
alternates
[
-group
name
...]
regex
[
regex
...]unalternates
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
regex
... }
With various functions, NeoMutt will treat messages differently, depending on whether you sent them or whether you received them from someone else. For instance, when replying to a message that you sent to a different party, NeoMutt will automatically suggest to send the response to the original message's recipients — responding to yourself won't make much sense in many cases. (See $reply_to.)
Many users receive e-mail under a number of different addresses. To fully use NeoMutt's features here, the program must be able to recognize what e-mail addresses you receive mail under. That's the purpose of the alternates command: It takes a list of regular expressions, each of which can identify an address under which you receive e-mail.
As addresses are matched using regular expressions and not exact strict comparisons, you should make sure you specify your addresses as precise as possible to avoid mismatches. For example, if you specify:
alternates user@example
NeoMutt will consider
“
some-user@example
”as being your address, too which may not be desired. As a
solution, in such cases addresses should be specified as:
alternates '^user@example$'
The
-group
flag causes all of the subsequent regular
expressions to be added to the named group.
The unalternates command can be used to write exceptions to alternates patterns. If an address matches something in an alternates command, but you nonetheless do not think it is from you, you can list a more precise pattern under an unalternates command.
To remove a regular expression from the alternates list, use the unalternates command with exactly the same regex. Likewise, if the regex for an alternates command matches an entry on the unalternates list, that unalternates entry will be removed. If the regex for unalternates is “*”, all entries on alternates will be removed.
Usage:
lists
[
-group
name
...]
regex
[
regex
...]unlists
{
*
|
regex
... }subscribe
[
-group
name
...]
regex
[
regex
...]unsubscribe
{
*
|
regex
... }
NeoMutt has a few nice features for
handling mailing lists. In order to
take advantage of them, you must specify which addresses belong to
mailing lists, and which mailing lists you are subscribed to. NeoMutt also
has limited support for auto-detecting mailing lists: it supports parsing
mailto:
links in the common
List-Post:
header which has the same effect as
specifying the list address via the
lists command (except the group feature). Once you have
done this, the
<list-reply>
function will work for all known lists. Additionally, when you
send a message to a subscribed list, NeoMutt will add a Mail-Followup-To
header to tell other users' mail user agents not to send copies of
replies to your personal address.
The Mail-Followup-To header is a non-standard extension which is not supported by all mail user agents. Adding it is not bullet-proof against receiving personal CCs of list messages. Also note that the generation of the Mail-Followup-To header is controlled by the $followup_to configuration variable since it's common practice on some mailing lists to send Cc upon replies (which is more a group- than a list-reply).
More precisely, NeoMutt maintains lists of patterns for the addresses of known and subscribed mailing lists. Every subscribed mailing list is known. To mark a mailing list as known, use the list command. To mark it as subscribed, use subscribe.
You can use regular expressions with both commands. To mark all messages sent to a specific bug report's address on Debian's bug tracking system as list mail, for instance, you could say
subscribe [0-9]+.*@bugs.debian.org
as it's often sufficient to just give a portion of the list's e-mail address.
Specify as much of the address as you need to to remove ambiguity.
For example, if you've subscribed to the NeoMutt mailing list, you will
receive mail addressed to
neomutt-users@neomutt.org
. So, to tell NeoMutt that this is a
mailing list, you could add
lists neomutt-users@
to your initialization file. To tell
NeoMutt that you are subscribed to it, add
subscribe neomutt-users
to your initialization
file instead. If you also happen to get mail from someone whose address
is
neomutt-users@example.com
, you could use
lists ^neomutt-users@neomutt\\.org$
or
subscribe ^neomutt-users@neomutt\\.org$
to match
only mail from the actual list.
The
-group
flag adds all of the subsequent regular
expressions to the named
address group in addition to adding to
the specified address list.
The “unlists” command is used to remove a token from the list of known and subscribed mailing-lists. Use “unlists *”to remove all tokens.
To remove a mailing list from the list of subscribed mailing lists, but keep it on the list of known mailing lists, use unsubscribe.
Usage:
mbox-hook
[!]regex
mailbox
This command is used to move read messages from a specified mailbox to a different mailbox automatically when you quit or change folders. regex is a regular expression specifying the mailbox to treat as a “spool” mailbox and mailbox specifies where mail should be saved when read.
The regex parameter has mailbox shortcut expansion performed on the first character. See Mailbox Matching in Hooksfor more details.
Note that execution of mbox-hooks is dependent on the $move configuration variable. If set to “no”(the default), mbox-hooks will not be executed.
Unlike some of the other hook commands, only the first matching regex is used (it is not possible to save read mail in more than a single mailbox).
Usage:
mailboxes
mailbox
[
mailbox
...]unmailboxes
{
*
|
mailbox
... }
This command specifies folders which can receive mail and which will be checked for new messages periodically.
folder can either be a local file or directory (Mbox/Mmdf or Maildir/Mh). If NeoMutt was built with POP and/or IMAP support, folder can also be a POP/IMAP folder URL. The URL syntax is described in Section 1.2, “URL Syntax”, POP and IMAP are described in Section 3, “POP3 Support”and Section 4, “IMAP Support”respectively.
NeoMutt provides a number of advanced features for handling (possibly many) folders and new mail within them, please refer to Section 13, “New Mail Detection”for details (including in what situations and how often NeoMutt checks for new mail).
The “unmailboxes” command is used to remove a token from the list of folders which receive mail. Use “unmailboxes *”to remove all tokens.
The folders in the mailboxes command are resolved when the command is executed, so if these names contain shortcut characters(such as “=”and “!”), any variable definition that affects these characters (like $folder and $spoolfile) should be set before the mailboxes command. If none of these shortcuts are used, a local path should be absolute as otherwise NeoMutt tries to find it relative to the directory from where NeoMutt was started which may not always be desired.
Usage:
my_hdr
string
unmy_hdr
{
*
|
field
... }
The my_hdr command allows you to create your own header fields which will be added to every message you send and appear in the editor if $edit_headers is set.
For example, if you would like to add an
“Organization:”header field to all of your outgoing
messages, you can put the command something like shown in
Example 3.11, “Defining custom headers”in your
.neomuttrc
.
Space characters are not allowed between the keyword and the colon ( “:”). The standard for electronic mail (RFC2822) says that space is illegal there, so NeoMutt enforces the rule.
If you would like to add a header field to a single message, you
should either set the
$edit_headers variable, or use the
<edit-headers>
function (default:
“E”) in the compose menu so that you can edit the header of
your message along with the body.
To remove user defined header fields, use the unmy_hdr command. You may specify an asterisk ( “*”) to remove all header fields, or the fields to remove. For example, to remove all “To” and “Cc” header fields, you could use:
unmy_hdr to cc
Usage:
save-hook
[!]pattern
mailbox
This command is used to override the default mailbox used when saving messages. mailbox will be used as the default if the message matches pattern, see Message Matching in Hooksfor information on the exact format.
To provide more flexibility and good defaults, NeoMutt applies the expandos of $index_format to mailbox after it was expanded.
Example 3.12. Using %-expandos in save-hook
# default: save all to ~/Mail/<author name> save-hook . ~/Mail/%F # save from me@turing.cs.hmc.edu and me@cs.hmc.edu to $folder/elkins save-hook me@(turing\\.)?cs\\.hmc\\.edu$ +elkins # save from aol.com to $folder/spam save-hook aol\\.com$ +spam
Also see the fcc-save-hook command.
Usage:
fcc-hook
[!]pattern
mailbox
This command is used to save outgoing mail in a mailbox other than $record. NeoMutt searches the initial list of message recipients for the first matching pattern and uses mailbox as the default Fcc: mailbox. If no match is found the message will be saved to $record mailbox.
To provide more flexibility and good defaults, NeoMutt applies the expandos of $index_format to mailbox after it was expanded.
See Message Matching in Hooksfor information on the exact format of pattern.
fcc-hook [@.]aol\\.com$ +spammers
...will save a copy of all messages going to the aol.com domain to the `+spammers' mailbox by default. Also see the fcc-save-hook command.
Usage:
fcc-save-hook
[!]pattern
mailbox
This command is a shortcut, equivalent to doing both a fcc-hook and a save-hook with its arguments, including %-expansion on mailbox according to $index_format.
Usage:
reply-hook
[!]pattern
command
send-hook
[!]pattern
command
send2-hook
[!]pattern
command
These commands can be used to execute arbitrary configuration commands based upon recipients of the message. pattern is used to match the message, see Message Matching in Hooksfor details. command is executed when pattern matches.
reply-hook is matched against the message you are replying to, instead of the message you are sending. send-hook is matched against all messages, both new and replies.
reply-hooks are matched
before the
send-hook,
regardless of the order specified in the user's
configuration file. However, you can inhibit
send-hook in the reply case by using the pattern
'! ~Q'
(
not replied, see
Message Matching in Hooks) in the
send-hook to tell when
reply-hook have been executed.
send2-hook is matched every time a message is changed, either by editing it, or by using the compose menu to change its recipients or subject. send2-hook is executed after send-hook, and can, e.g., be used to set parameters such as the $sendmail variable depending on the message's sender address.
For each type of
send-hook or
reply-hook, when multiple matches occur, commands are
executed in the order they are specified in the
.neomuttrc
(for that type of hook).
Example:
send-hook work "
set mime_forward signature=''"
Another typical use for this command is to change the values of the $attribution, $attribution_locale, and $signature variables in order to change the language of the attributions and signatures based upon the recipients.
send-hook's are only executed once after getting the initial list of recipients. Adding a recipient after replying or editing the message will not cause any send-hook to be executed, similarly if $autoedit is set (as then the initial list of recipients is empty). Also note that my_hdr commands which modify recipient headers, or the message's subject, don't have any effect on the current message when executed from a send-hook.
Usage:
message-hook
[!]pattern
command
This command can be used to execute arbitrary configuration
commands before viewing or formatting a message based upon information
about the message.
command is executed if the
pattern matches the message to be displayed. When
multiple matches occur, commands are executed in the order they are
specified in the
.neomuttrc
.
See Message Matching in Hooksfor information on the exact format of pattern.
Example:
message-hook ~A 'set pager=builtin' message-hook '~f freshmeat-news' 'set pager="less \"+/^ subject: .*\""'
Usage:
crypt-hook
regex
keyid
When encrypting messages with PGP/GnuPG or OpenSSL, you may want to associate a certain key with a given e-mail address automatically, either because the recipient's public key can't be deduced from the destination address, or because, for some reasons, you need to override the key NeoMutt would normally use. The crypt-hook command provides a method by which you can specify the ID of the public key to be used when encrypting messages to a certain recipient. You may use multiple crypt-hooks with the same regex; multiple matching crypt-hooks result in the use of multiple keyids for a recipient. During key selection, NeoMutt will confirm whether each crypt-hook is to be used (unless the $crypt_confirmhook option is unset). If all crypt-hooks for a recipient are declined, NeoMutt will use the original recipient address for key selection instead.
The meaning of keyid is to be taken broadly in this context: You can either put a numerical key ID or fingerprint here, an e-mail address, or even just a real name.
Usage:
push
string
This command adds the named string to the beginning of the keyboard buffer. The string may contain control characters, key names and function names like the sequence string in the macro command. You may use it to automatically run a sequence of commands at startup, or when entering certain folders. For example, Example 3.13, “Embedding push in folder-hook”shows how to automatically collapse all threads when entering a folder.
For using functions like shown in the example, it's important to
use angle brackets (
“<”and
“>”) to make NeoMutt recognize the input as a function name.
Otherwise it will simulate individual just keystrokes, i.e.
“
push collapse-all
”would be interpreted as if you had typed
“c”, followed by
“o”, followed by
“l”, ..., which is not desired and may lead to very
unexpected behavior.
Keystrokes can be used, too, but are less portable because of potentially changed key bindings. With default bindings, this is equivalent to the above example:
folder-hook . 'push \eV'
because it simulates that Esc+V was pressed (which is the default
binding of
<collapse-all>
).
Usage:
exec
function
[
function
...]
This command can be used to execute any function. Functions are
listed in the
function reference.
“
exec
function
”is equivalent to
“
push <function>
”.
Usage:
score
pattern
value
unscore
{
*
|
pattern
... }
The
score commands adds
value to a message's score if
pattern matches it.
pattern is a string in the format described in the
patterns section (note: For efficiency
reasons, patterns which scan information not available in the index, such
as
~b
,
~B
,
~h
, or
~X
may not be used).
value is a positive or negative integer. A message's
final score is the sum total of all matching
score entries. However, you may optionally prefix
value with an equal sign (
“=”) to cause evaluation to stop at a particular entry if
there is a match. Negative final scores are rounded up to 0.
The unscore command removes score entries from the list. You must specify the same pattern specified in the score command for it to be removed. The pattern “*”is a special token which means to clear the list of all score entries.
Scoring occurs as the messages are read in, before the mailbox is sorted. Because of this, patterns which depend on threading, such as ~=, ~$, and ~(), will not work by default. A workaround is to push the scoring command in a folder hook. This will cause the mailbox to be rescored after it is opened and input starts being processed:
folder-hook . 'push "<enter-command>score ~= 10<enter>"'
Usage:
spam
pattern
format
nospam
{
*
|
pattern
}
NeoMutt has generalized support for external spam-scoring filters. By
defining your spam patterns with the
spam and
nospam
commands, you can
limit,
search, and
sort your mail based on its spam attributes, as
determined by the external filter. You also can display the spam
attributes in your index display using the
%H
selector in the
$index_format variable. (Tip: try
%?H?[%H] ?
to display spam tags only when they are
defined for a given message.)
Your first step is to define your external filter's spam patterns
using the
spam command.
pattern should be a regular expression that matches a
header in a mail message. If any message in the mailbox matches this
regular expression, it will receive a
“spam tag” or
“spam attribute”(unless it also matches a
nospam pattern — see below.) The appearance of this
attribute is entirely up to you, and is governed by the
format parameter.
format can be any static text, but it also can
include back-references from the
pattern expression. (A regular expression
“back-reference” refers to a sub-expression contained within
parentheses.)
%1
is replaced with the first back-reference in the
regex,
%2
with the second, etc.
To match spam tags, NeoMutt needs the corresponding header information which is always the case for local and POP folders but not for IMAP in the default configuration. Depending on the spam header to be analyzed, $imap_headers may need to be adjusted.
If you're using multiple spam filters, a message can have more than one spam-related header. You can define spam patterns for each filter you use. If a message matches two or more of these patterns, and the $spam_separator variable is set to a string, then the message's spam tag will consist of all the format strings joined together, with the value of $spam_separator separating them.
For example, suppose one uses DCC, SpamAssassin, and PureMessage, then the configuration might look like in Example 3.14, “Configuring spam detection”.
Example 3.14. Configuring spam detection
spam "X-DCC-.*-Metrics:.*(....)=many" "90+/DCC-%1" spam "X-Spam-Status: Yes" "90+/SA" spam "X-PerlMX-Spam: .*Probability=([0-9]+)%" "%1/PM" set spam_separator=", "
If then a message is received that DCC registered with
“many” hits under the
“Fuz2” checksum, and that PureMessage registered with a 97%
probability of being spam, that message's spam tag would read
90+/DCC-Fuz2, 97/PM
. (The four characters before
“=many” in a DCC report indicate the checksum used — in this
case,
“Fuz2”.)
If the $spam_separator variable is unset, then each spam pattern match supersedes the previous one. Instead of getting joined format strings, you'll get only the last one to match.
The spam tag is what will be displayed in the index when you use
%H
in the
$index_format variable. It's also the
string that the
~H
pattern-matching expression matches against for
<search>
and
<limit>
functions. And it's what sorting by spam
attribute will use as a sort key.
That's a pretty complicated example, and most people's actual environments will have only one spam filter. The simpler your configuration, the more effective NeoMutt can be, especially when it comes to sorting.
Generally, when you sort by spam tag, NeoMutt will sort
lexically— that is, by ordering strings
alphanumerically. However, if a spam tag begins with a number, NeoMutt will
sort numerically first, and lexically only when two numbers are equal in
value. (This is like UNIX's
sort -n
.) A message with no spam attributes at all —
that is, one that didn't match
any of your
spam patterns — is sorted at lowest priority. Numbers
are sorted next, beginning with 0 and ranging upward. Finally,
non-numeric strings are sorted, with
“a” taking lower priority than
“z”. Clearly, in general, sorting by spam tags is most
effective when you can coerce your filter to give you a raw number. But
in case you can't, NeoMutt can still do something useful.
The nospam command can be used to write exceptions to spam patterns. If a header pattern matches something in a spam command, but you nonetheless do not want it to receive a spam tag, you can list a more precise pattern under a nospam command.
If the pattern given to nospam is exactly the same as the pattern on an existing spam list entry, the effect will be to remove the entry from the spam list, instead of adding an exception. Likewise, if the pattern for a spam command matches an entry on the nospam list, that nospam entry will be removed. If the pattern for nospam is “*”, all entries on both lists will be removed. This might be the default action if you use spam and nospam in conjunction with a folder-hook.
You can have as many
spam or
nospam commands as you like. You can even do your own
primitive
spam detection within NeoMutt — for example, if you
consider all mail from
MAILER-DAEMON
to be spam, you can use a
spam command like this:
spam "^From: .*MAILER-DAEMON" "999"
NeoMutt supports these types of configuration variables:
A boolean expression, either “yes” or “no”.
A signed integer number in the range -32768 to 32767.
Arbitrary text.
A specialized string for representing paths including support for mailbox shortcuts (see Section 10, “Mailbox Shortcuts”) as well as tilde ( “~”) for a user's home directory and more.
Like a boolean but triggers a prompt when set to “ask-yes” or “ask-no” with “yes” and “no” preselected respectively.
A specialized string allowing only particular words as values depending on the variable.
A regular expression, see Section 2, “Regular Expressions”for an introduction.
Specifies the type of folder to use: mbox, mmdf, mh or maildir. Currently only used to determine the type for newly created folders.
An e-mail address either with or without realname. The
older
“
user@example.org (Joe User)
”form is supported but strongly deprecated.
Arbitrary text, see Section 26.3, “User-Defined Variables”for details.
The following commands are available to manipulate and query variables:
Usage:
set
{
[
no
|
inv
]
variable
|
variable=value
} [...]toggle
variable
[
variable
...]unset
variable
[
variable
...]reset
variable
[
variable
...]
This command is used to set (and unset) configuration variables. There are four basic types of variables: boolean, number, string and quadoption. boolean variables can be set(true) or unset(false). number variables can be assigned a positive integer value. string variables consist of any number of printable characters and must be enclosed in quotes if they contain spaces or tabs. You may also use the escape sequences “\n” and “\t” for newline and tab, respectively. quadoption variables are used to control whether or not to be prompted for certain actions, or to specify a default action. A value of yes will cause the action to be carried out automatically as if you had answered yes to the question. Similarly, a value of no will cause the action to be carried out as if you had answered “no.”A value of ask-yes will cause a prompt with a default answer of “yes” and ask-no will provide a default answer of “no.”
Prefixing a variable with
“no” will unset it. Example:
set noaskbcc
.
For
boolean variables, you may optionally prefix the
variable name with
inv
to toggle the value (on or off). This is useful
when writing macros. Example:
set invsmart_wrap
.
The
toggle command automatically prepends the
inv
prefix to all specified variables.
The
unset command automatically prepends the
no
prefix to all specified variables.
Using the
<enter-command>
function in the
index menu, you can query the value of a variable
by prefixing the name of the variable with a question mark:
set ?allow_8bit
The question mark is actually only required for boolean and quadoption variables.
The reset command resets all given variables to the compile time defaults (hopefully mentioned in this manual). If you use the command set and prefix the variable with “&”this has the same behavior as the reset command.
With the reset command there exists the special variable “all”, which allows you to reset all variables to their system defaults.
Along with the variables listed in the
Configuration variables section, NeoMutt
supports user-defined variables with names starting with
my_
as in, for example,
my_cfgdir
.
The
set command either creates a custom
my_
variable or changes its value if it does exist
already. The
unset and
reset commands remove the variable entirely.
Since user-defined variables are expanded in the same way that environment variables are (except for the shell-escape command and backtick expansion), this feature can be used to make configuration files more readable.
The following example defines and uses the variable
my_cfgdir
to abbreviate the calls of the
source
command:
Example 3.15. Using user-defined variables for config file readability
set my_cfgdir = $HOME/neomutt/config
source $my_cfgdir/hooks $my_cfgdir/macros
# more source commands...
A custom variable can also be used in macros to backup the
current value of another variable. In the following example, the
value of the
$delete is changed temporarily while its
original value is saved as
my_delete
. After the macro has executed all
commands, the original value of
$delete is restored.
Example 3.16. Using user-defined variables for backing up other config option values
macro pager ,x '\ <enter-command>set my_delete=$delete<enter>\ <enter-command>set delete=yes<enter>\ ...\ <enter-command>set delete=$my_delete<enter>'
Since NeoMutt expands such values already when parsing the
configuration file(s), the value of
$my_delete
in the last example would be the value
of
$delete exactly as it was at that point
during parsing the configuration file. If another statement would
change the value for
$delete later in the same or another
file, it would have no effect on
$my_delete
. However, the expansion can be deferred
to runtime, as shown in the next example, when escaping the dollar
sign.
Example 3.17. Deferring user-defined variable expansion to runtime
macro pager <PageDown> "\ <enter-command> set my_old_pager_stop=\$pager_stop pager_stop<Enter>\ <next-page>\ <enter-command> set pager_stop=\$my_old_pager_stop<Enter>\ <enter-command> unset my_old_pager_stop<Enter>"
Note that there is a space between
<enter-command>
and the
set configuration command, preventing NeoMutt from
recording the
macro's commands into its history.
Variables are always assigned string values which NeoMutt parses into its internal representation according to the type of the variable, for example an integer number for numeric types. For all queries (including $-expansion) the value is converted from its internal type back into string. As a result, any variable can be assigned any value given that its content is valid for the target. This also counts for custom variables which are of type string. In case of parsing errors, NeoMutt will print error messages. Example 3.18, “Type conversions using variables”demonstrates type conversions.
Example 3.18. Type conversions using variables
set my_lines = "5" # value is string "5" set pager_index_lines = $my_lines # value is integer 5 set my_sort = "date-received" # value is string "date-received" set sort = "last-$my_sort" # value is sort last-date-received set my_inc = $read_inc # value is string "10" (default of $read_inc) set my_foo = $my_inc # value is string "10"
These assignments are all valid. If, however, the value of
$my_lines
would have been
“five”(or something else that cannot be parsed into a
number), the assignment to
$pager_index_lines
would have produced an error
message.
Type conversion applies to all configuration commands which take arguments. But please note that every expanded value of a variable is considered just a single token. A working example is:
set my_pattern = "~A"
set my_number = "10"
# same as: score ~A +10
score $my_pattern +$my_number
What does not work is:
set my_mx = "+mailbox1 +mailbox2" mailboxes $my_mx +mailbox3
because the value of
$my_mx
is interpreted as a single mailbox named
“+mailbox1 +mailbox2” and not two distinct
mailboxes.
Usage:
source
file
...
This command allows the inclusion of initialization commands from
other files. For example, I place all of my aliases in
~/.mail_aliases
so that I can make my
~/.neomuttrc
readable and keep my aliases private.
If the filename begins with a tilde ( “~”), it will be expanded to the path of your home directory.
If the filename ends with a vertical bar (
“|”), then
filename is considered to be an executable program
from which to read input (e.g.
source~/bin/myscript|
).
Usage:
unhook
{
*
|
hook-type
}
This command permits you to flush hooks you have previously
defined. You can either remove all hooks by giving the
“*”character as an argument, or you can remove all hooks of
a specific type by saying something like
unhook send-hook
.
Format strings are a general concept you'll find in several locations through the NeoMutt configuration, especially in the $index_format, $pager_format, $status_format, and other related variables. These can be very straightforward, and it's quite possible you already know how to use them.
The most basic format string element is a percent symbol followed
by another character. For example,
%s
represents a message's Subject: header in the
$index_format variable. The
“expandos” available are documented with each format
variable, but there are general modifiers available with all formatting
expandos, too. Those are our concern here.
Some of the modifiers are borrowed right out of C (though you
might know them from Perl, Python, shell, or another language). These
are the
[-]m.n
modifiers, as in
%-12.12s
. As with such programming languages, these
modifiers allow you to specify the minimum and maximum size of the
resulting string, as well as its justification. If the
“-”sign follows the percent, the string will be
left-justified instead of right-justified. If there's a number
immediately following that, it's the minimum amount of space the
formatted string will occupy — if it's naturally smaller than that, it
will be padded out with spaces. If a decimal point and another number
follow, that's the maximum space allowable — the string will not be
permitted to exceed that width, no matter its natural size. Each of
these three elements is optional, so that all these are legal format
strings:
%-12s
,
%4c
,
%.15F
and
%-12.15L
.
NeoMutt adds some other modifiers to format strings. If you use an
equals symbol (
=
) as a numeric prefix (like the minus above), it
will force the string to be centered within its minimum space range.
For example,
%=14y
will reserve 14 characters for the %y expansion
— that's the set of message keywords (formerly X-Label). If the
expansion results in a string less than 14 characters, it will be
centered in a 14-character space. If the X-Label for a message were
“test”, that expansion would look like
“
test ”.
There are two very little-known modifiers that affect the way that an expando is replaced. If there is an underline ( “_”) character between any format modifiers (as above) and the expando letter, it will expands in all lower case. And if you use a colon ( “:”), it will replace all decimal points with underlines.
Depending on the format string variable, some of its sequences can be used to optionally print a string if their value is nonzero. For example, you may only want to see the number of flagged messages if such messages exist, since zero is not particularly meaningful. To optionally print a string based upon one of the above sequences, the following construct is used:
%?<sequence_char>?<optional_string>?
where sequence_char is an expando, and optional_string is the string you would like printed if sequence_char is nonzero. optional_string may contain other sequences as well as normal text, but you may not nest optional strings.
Here is an example illustrating how to optionally print the number of new messages in a mailbox in $status_format:
%?n?%n new messages.?
You can also switch between two strings using the following construct:
%?<sequence_char>?<if_string>&<else_string>?
If the value of sequence_char is non-zero, if_string will be expanded, otherwise else_string will be expanded.
The conditional sequences can also be nested by using the %< and > operators. The %? notation can still be used but requires quoting. For example:
%<x?true&false> %<x?%<y?%<z?xyz&xy>&x>&none>
For more examples, see Section 24, “Nested If Feature”
Any format string ending in a vertical bar ( “|”) will be expanded and piped through the first word in the string, using spaces as separator. The string returned will be used for display. If the returned string ends in %, it will be passed through the formatter a second time. This allows the filter to generate a replacement format string including % expandos.
All % expandos in a format string are expanded before the script is called so that:
will make NeoMutt expand
%r
,
%f
and
%L
before calling the script. The example also shows
that arguments can be quoted: the script will receive the expanded
string between the single quotes as the only argument.
A practical example is the
mutt_xtitle
script installed in the
samples
subdirectory of the NeoMutt documentation: it
can be used as filter for
$status_format to set the current
terminal's title, if supported.
In most format strings, NeoMutt supports different types of padding using special %-expandos:
%|X
When this occurs, NeoMutt will fill the rest of the line with
the character
X
. For example, filling the rest of the line
with dashes is done by setting:
set status_format = "%v on %h: %B: %?n?%n&no? new messages %|-"
%>X
Since the previous expando stops at the end of line, there
must be a way to fill the gap between two items via the
%>X
expando: it puts as many characters
X
in between two items so that the rest of the
line will be right-justified. For example, to not put the version
string and hostname the above example on the left but on the
right and fill the gap with spaces, one might use (note the space
after
%>
):
set status_format = "%B: %?n?%n&no? new messages %> (%v on %h)"
%*X
Normal right-justification will print everything to the
left of the
%>
, displaying padding and whatever lies to
the right only if there's room. By contrast,
“soft-fill” gives priority to the right-hand side,
guaranteeing space to display it and showing padding only if
there's still room. If necessary, soft-fill will eat text
leftwards to make room for rightward text. For example, to
right-justify the subject making sure as much as possible of it
fits on screen, one might use (note two spaces after
%*
: the second ensures there's a space between
the truncated right-hand side and the subject):
set index_format="%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%?l?%4l&%4c?)%* %s"
This feature allows the format of dates in the index to vary based on how recent the message is. This is especially useful in combination with the nested-if feature.
For example, using
%<[y?%<[d?%[%H:%M]&%[%m/%d]>&%[%y.%m]>
for
the date in the
$index_format
will produce a display like:
1 + 14.12 Grace Hall ( 13) Gulliver's Travels 2 + 10/02 Callum Harrison ( 48) Huckleberry Finn 3 12:17 Rhys Lee ( 42) The Lord Of The Rings
Usage:
mailto_allow
{
*
|
header-field
... }unmailto_allow
{
*
|
header-field
... }
As a security measure, NeoMutt will only add user-approved header
fields from a
mailto:
URL. This is necessary since NeoMutt will handle
certain header fields, such as
Attach:
, in a special way. The
mailto_allow
and
unmailto_allow
commands allow the user to modify the
list of approved headers.
NeoMutt initializes the default list to contain only the
Subject
and
Body
header fields, which are the only requirement
specified by the
mailto:
specification in RFC2368, and
the Cc
, In-Reply-To
,
References
headers to aid with replies to
mailing lists.
Table of Contents
A “character set” is basically a mapping between bytes and glyphs and implies a certain character encoding scheme. For example, for the ISO 8859 family of character sets, an encoding of 8bit per character is used. For the Unicode character set, different character encodings may be used, UTF-8 being the most popular. In UTF-8, a character is represented using a variable number of bytes ranging from 1 to 4.
Since NeoMutt is a command-line tool run from a shell, and delegates
certain tasks to external tools (such as an editor for composing/editing
messages), all of these tools need to agree on a character set and
encoding. There exists no way to reliably deduce the character set a
plain text file has. Interoperability is gained by the use of
well-defined environment variables. The full set can be printed by
issuing
locale
on the command line.
Upon startup, NeoMutt determines the character set on its own using
routines that inspect locale-specific environment variables. Therefore,
it is generally not necessary to set the
$charset
variable in NeoMutt. It may even be
counter-productive as NeoMutt uses system and library functions that derive
the character set themselves and on which NeoMutt has no influence. It's
safest to let NeoMutt work out the locale setup itself.
If you happen to work with several character sets on a regular basis, it's highly advisable to use Unicode and an UTF-8 locale. Unicode can represent nearly all characters in a message at the same time. When not using a Unicode locale, it may happen that you receive messages with characters not representable in your locale. When displaying such a message, or replying to or forwarding it, information may get lost possibly rendering the message unusable (not only for you but also for the recipient, this breakage is not reversible as lost information cannot be guessed).
A Unicode locale makes all conversions superfluous which eliminates the risk of conversion errors. It also eliminates potentially wrong expectations about the character set between NeoMutt and external programs.
The terminal emulator used also must be properly configured for the current locale. Terminal emulators usually do not derive the locale from environment variables, they need to be configured separately. If the terminal is incorrectly configured, NeoMutt may display random and unexpected characters (question marks, octal codes, or just random glyphs), format strings may not work as expected, you may not be abled to enter non-ascii characters, and possible more. Data is always represented using bytes and so a correct setup is very important as to the machine, all character sets “look” the same.
Warning: A mismatch between what system and library functions think
the locale is and what NeoMutt was told what the locale is may make it
behave badly with non-ascii input: it will fail at seemingly random
places. This warning is to be taken seriously since not only local mail
handling may suffer: sent messages may carry wrong character set
information the
receiver has too deal with. The need to set
$charset
directly in most cases points at terminal and
environment variable setup problems, not NeoMutt problems.
A list of officially assigned and known character sets can be found
at
IANA,
a list of locally supported locales can be obtained by running
locale -a
.
All string patterns in NeoMutt including those in more complex patterns must be specified using regular expressions (regex) in the “POSIX extended” syntax (which is more or less the syntax used by egrep and GNU awk). For your convenience, we have included below a brief description of this syntax.
The search is case sensitive if the pattern contains at least one upper case letter, and case insensitive otherwise.
“\”must be quoted if used for a regular expression in an initialization command: “\\”.
A regular expression is a pattern that describes a set of strings. Regular expressions are constructed analogously to arithmetic expressions, by using various operators to combine smaller expressions.
The regular expression can be enclosed/delimited by either " or ' which is useful if the regular expression includes a white-space character. See Syntax of Initialization Filesfor more information on " and ' delimiter processing. To match a literal " or ' you must preface it with \ (backslash).
The fundamental building blocks are the regular expressions that match a single character. Most characters, including all letters and digits, are regular expressions that match themselves. Any metacharacter with special meaning may be quoted by preceding it with a backslash.
The period “.”matches any single character. The caret “^”and the dollar sign “$”are metacharacters that respectively match the empty string at the beginning and end of a line.
A list of characters enclosed by “[”and “]”matches any single character in that list; if the first character of the list is a caret “^”then it matches any character not in the list. For example, the regular expression [0123456789]matches any single digit. A range of ASCII characters may be specified by giving the first and last characters, separated by a hyphen “-”. Most metacharacters lose their special meaning inside lists. To include a literal “]”place it first in the list. Similarly, to include a literal “^”place it anywhere but first. Finally, to include a literal hyphen “-”place it last.
Certain named classes of characters are predefined. Character classes consist of “[:”, a keyword denoting the class, and “:]”. The following classes are defined by the POSIX standard in Table 4.1, “POSIX regular expression character classes”
Table 4.1. POSIX regular expression character classes
Character class | Description |
---|---|
[:alnum:] | Alphanumeric characters |
[:alpha:] | Alphabetic characters |
[:blank:] | Space or tab characters |
[:cntrl:] | Control characters |
[:digit:] | Numeric characters |
[:graph:] | Characters that are both printable and visible. (A space is printable, but not visible, while an “a” is both) |
[:lower:] | Lower-case alphabetic characters |
[:print:] | Printable characters (characters that are not control characters) |
[:punct:] | Punctuation characters (characters that are not letter, digits, control characters, or space characters) |
[:space:] | Space characters (such as space, tab and formfeed, to name a few) |
[:upper:] | Upper-case alphabetic characters |
[:xdigit:] | Characters that are hexadecimal digits |
A character class is only valid in a regular expression inside the brackets of a character list.
Note that the brackets in these class names are part of the symbolic names, and must be included in addition to the brackets delimiting the bracket list. For example, [[:digit:]]is equivalent to [0-9].
Two additional special sequences can appear in character lists. These apply to non-ASCII character sets, which can have single symbols (called collating elements) that are represented with more than one character, as well as several characters that are equivalent for collating or sorting purposes:
A collating symbol is a multi-character collating element enclosed in “[.”and “.]”. For example, if “ch” is a collating element, then [[.ch.]]is a regex that matches this collating element, while [ch]is a regex that matches either “c” or “h”.
An equivalence class is a locale-specific name for a list of characters that are equivalent. The name is enclosed in “[=”and “=]”. For example, the name “e” might be used to represent all of “e” with grave ( “è”), “e” with acute ( “é”) and “e”. In this case, [[=e=]]is a regex that matches any of: “e” with grave ( “è”), “e” with acute ( “é”) and “e”.
A regular expression matching a single character may be followed by one of several repetition operators described in Table 4.2, “Regular expression repetition operators”.
Table 4.2. Regular expression repetition operators
Operator | Description |
---|---|
? | The preceding item is optional and matched at most once |
* | The preceding item will be matched zero or more times |
+ | The preceding item will be matched one or more times |
{n} | The preceding item is matched exactly n times |
{n,} | The preceding item is matched n or more times |
{,m} | The preceding item is matched at most m times |
{n,m} | The preceding item is matched at least n times, but no more than m times |
Two regular expressions may be concatenated; the resulting regular expression matches any string formed by concatenating two substrings that respectively match the concatenated subexpressions.
Two regular expressions may be joined by the infix operator “|”; the resulting regular expression matches any string matching either subexpression.
Repetition takes precedence over concatenation, which in turn takes precedence over alternation. A whole subexpression may be enclosed in parentheses to override these precedence rules.
If you compile NeoMutt with the included regular expression engine, the following operators may also be used in regular expressions as described in Table 4.3, “GNU regular expression extensions”.
Table 4.3. GNU regular expression extensions
Expression | Description |
---|---|
\\y | Matches the empty string at either the beginning or the end of a word |
\\B | Matches the empty string within a word |
\\< | Matches the empty string at the beginning of a word |
\\> | Matches the empty string at the end of a word |
\\w | Matches any word-constituent character (letter, digit, or underscore) |
\\W | Matches any character that is not word-constituent |
\\` | Matches the empty string at the beginning of a buffer (string) |
\\' | Matches the empty string at the end of a buffer |
Please note however that these operators are not defined by POSIX, so they may or may not be available in stock libraries on various systems.
Many of NeoMutt's commands allow you to specify a pattern to match (
limit
,
tag-pattern
,
delete-pattern
, etc.).
Table 4.4, “Pattern modifiers”shows several ways to select
messages.
Table 4.4. Pattern modifiers
Pattern modifier | Description |
---|---|
~A | all messages |
~b EXPR | messages which contain EXPR in the message body |
=b STRING | messages which contain STRING in the message body. If IMAP is enabled, searches for STRING on the server, rather than downloading each message and searching it locally. |
~B EXPR | messages which contain EXPR in the whole message |
=B STRING | messages which contain STRING in the whole message. If IMAP is enabled, searches for STRING on the server, rather than downloading each message and searching it locally. |
~c EXPR | messages carbon-copied to EXPR |
%c GROUP | messages carbon-copied to any member of GROUP |
~C EXPR | messages either to: or cc: EXPR |
%C GROUP | messages either to: or cc: to any member of GROUP |
~d [ MIN]-[ MAX] | messages with “date-sent” in a Date range |
~D | deleted messages |
~e EXPR | messages which contains EXPR in the “Sender” field |
%e GROUP | messages which contain a member of GROUP in the “Sender” field |
~E | expired messages |
~F | flagged messages |
~f EXPR | messages originating from EXPR |
%f GROUP | messages originating from any member of GROUP |
~g | cryptographically signed messages |
~G | cryptographically encrypted messages |
~h EXPR | messages which contain EXPR in the message header |
=h STRING | messages which contain STRING in the message header. If IMAP is enabled, searches for STRING on the server, rather than downloading each message and searching it locally; STRING must be of the form “header: substring”(see below). |
~H EXPR | messages with a spam attribute matching EXPR |
~i EXPR | messages which match EXPR in the “Message-ID” field |
~k | messages which contain PGP key material |
~L EXPR | messages either originated or received by EXPR |
%L GROUP | message either originated or received by any member of GROUP |
~l | messages addressed to a known mailing list |
~m [ MIN]-[ MAX] | messages with numbers in the range MIN to MAX***) |
~m <[ MAX] | messages with numbers less than MAX***) |
~m >[ MIN] | messages with numbers greater than MIN***) |
~m [ M] | just message number M***) |
~m [ MIN],[ MAX] | messages with offsets (from selected message) in the range MIN to MAX***) |
~n [ MIN]-[ MAX] | messages with a score in the range MIN to MAX*) |
~N | new messages |
~O | old messages |
~p | messages addressed to you (consults alternates) |
~P | messages from you (consults alternates) |
~Q | messages which have been replied to |
~r [ MIN]-[ MAX] | messages with “date-received” in a Date range |
~R | read messages |
~s EXPR | messages having EXPR in the “Subject” field. |
~S | superseded messages |
~t EXPR | messages addressed to EXPR |
~T | tagged messages |
~u | messages addressed to a subscribed mailing list |
~U | unread messages |
~v | messages part of a collapsed thread. |
~V | cryptographically verified messages |
~x EXPR | messages which contain EXPR in the “References” or “In-Reply-To” field |
~X [ MIN]-[ MAX] | messages with MIN to MAX attachments *) |
~y EXPR | messages which contain EXPR in their keywords |
~z [ MIN]-[ MAX] | messages with a size in the range MIN to MAX*) **) |
=/ STRING | IMAP custom server-side search for STRING. Currently only defined for Gmail. See: GMail Patterns |
~= | duplicated messages (see $duplicate_threads) |
~# | broken threads (see $strict_threads) |
~$ | unreferenced messages (requires threaded view) |
~( PATTERN) | messages in threads containing messages matching PATTERN, e.g. all threads containing messages from you: ~(~P) |
~<( PATTERN) | messages whose immediate parent matches PATTERN, e.g. replies to your messages: ~<(~P) |
~>( PATTERN) | messages having an immediate child matching PATTERN, e.g. messages you replied to: ~>(~P) |
Where EXPR is a regular expression, and GROUP is an address group.
*) The forms “<[ MAX]”, “>[ MIN]”, “[ MIN]-”and “-[ MAX]”are allowed, too.
**) The suffixes “K” and “M” are allowed to specify kilobyte and megabyte respectively.
***) The message number ranges (introduced by
~m
) are even more general and powerful than the
other types of ranges. Read on and see
Section 3.1.1, “Message Ranges”below.
Special attention has to be paid when using regular expressions
inside of patterns. Specifically, NeoMutt's parser for these patterns will
strip one level of backslash (
“\”), which is normally used for quoting. If it is your
intention to use a backslash in the regular expression, you will need
to use two backslashes instead (
“\\”). You can force NeoMutt to treat
EXPR as a simple substring instead of a regular
expression by using = instead of ~ in the pattern name. For example,
=b *.*
will find all messages that contain the
literal string
“*.*”. Simple string matches are less powerful than
regular expressions but can be considerably faster. This is especially
true for IMAP folders, because string matches can be performed on the
server instead of by fetching every message. IMAP treats
=h
specially: it must be of the form
“header: substring” and will not partially match header
names. The substring part may be omitted if you simply wish to find
messages containing a particular header without regard to its
value.
Patterns matching lists of addresses (notably c, C, p, P and t) match if there is at least one match in the whole list. If you want to make sure that all elements of that list match, you need to prefix your pattern with “^”. This example matches all mails which only has recipients from Germany.
You can restrict address pattern matching to aliases that you have defined with the "@" modifier. This example matches messages whose recipients are all from Germany, and who are known to your alias list.
To match any defined alias, use a regular expression that matches any string. This example matches messages whose senders are known aliases.
If a message number range (from now on: MNR) contains a comma (
,
), it is a
relative MNR. That means the numbers denote
offsets from the highlighted message. For
example:
Table 4.5. Relative Message Number Ranges
Pattern | Explanation |
---|---|
~m -2,2
| Previous 2, highlighted and next 2 emails |
~m 0,1
| Highlighted and next email |
In addition to numbers, either side of the range can also
contain one of the special characters (shortcuts)
.^$
. The meaning is:
Table 4.6. Message Number Shortcuts
Shortcut | Explanation | Example | Meaning |
---|---|---|---|
.
| Current / Highlighted |
~m -3,.
| Previous 3 emails plus the highlighted one |
$
| Last |
~m .,$
| Highlighted email and all the later ones |
^
| First |
~m ^,1
| Highlighted, next and all preceding ones |
Lastly, you can also leave either side of the range blank, to
make it extend as far as possible. For example,
~m ,1
has the same meaning as the last example in
Table 4.6, “Message Number Shortcuts”.
Otherwise, if a MNR doesn't contain a comma, the meaning is similar to other ranges, except that the shortcuts are still available. Examples:
Table 4.7. Absolute Message Number Ranges
Pattern | Explanation |
---|---|
~m 3-10
| Emails 3 to 10 |
~m -10
| Emails 1 to 10 |
~m 10-
| Emails 10 to last |
~m <3
| First and second email |
~m ^-2
| First and second email |
~m >1
| Everything but first email |
~m 2-$
| Everything but first email |
~m 2
| Just the second email |
NeoMutt supports two versions of so called “simple searches”. These are issued if the query entered for searching, limiting and similar operations does not seem to contain a valid pattern modifier (i.e. it does not contain one of these characters: “~”, “=”or “%”). If the query is supposed to contain one of these special characters, they must be escaped by prepending a backslash ( “\”).
The first type is by checking whether the query string equals a
keyword case-insensitively from
Table 4.8, “Simple search keywords”: If that is the case, NeoMutt
will use the shown pattern modifier instead. If a keyword would
conflict with your search keyword, you need to turn it into a regular
expression to avoid matching the keyword table. For example, if you
want to find all messages matching
“flag”(using
$simple_search) but don't want to
match flagged messages, simply search for
“
[f]lag
”.
Table 4.8. Simple search keywords
Keyword | Pattern modifier |
---|---|
all | ~A |
. | ~A |
^ | ~A |
del | ~D |
flag | ~F |
new | ~N |
old | ~O |
repl | ~Q |
read | ~R |
tag | ~T |
unread | ~U |
The second type of simple search is to build a complex search pattern using $simple_search as a template. NeoMutt will insert your query properly quoted and search for the composed complex query.
Logical AND is performed by specifying more than one criterion. For example:
~t work ~f elkins
would select messages which contain the word “work” in the list of recipients and that have the word “elkins” in the “From” header field.
NeoMutt also recognizes the following operators to create more complex search patterns:
! — logical NOT operator
| — logical OR operator
() — logical grouping operator
Here is an example illustrating a complex search pattern. This pattern will select all messages which do not contain “work” in the “To” or “Cc” field and which are from “elkins”.
Here is an example using white space in the regular expression (note the “'”and “"”delimiters). For this to match, the mail's subject must match the “^Junk +From +Me$”and it must be from either “Jim +Somebody” or “Ed +SomeoneElse”:
'~s "^Junk +From +Me$" ~f ("Jim +Somebody"|"Ed +SomeoneElse")'
If a regular expression contains parenthesis, or a vertical bar
("|"), you
must enclose the expression in double or single
quotes since those characters are also used to separate different
parts of NeoMutt's pattern language. For example:
~f "user@(home\.org|work\.com)"
Without the
quotes, the parenthesis wouldn't end. This would be separated to two
OR'd patterns:
~f user@(home\.org and
work\.com). They are never what you
want.
NeoMutt supports two types of dates, absolute and relative.
Dates must be in DD/MM/YY format (month and year are optional, defaulting to the current month and year). An example of a valid range of dates is:
Limit to messages matching: ~d 20/1/95-31/10
If you omit the minimum (first) date, and just specify “-DD/MM/YY”, all messages before the given date will be selected. If you omit the maximum (second) date, and specify “DD/MM/YY-”, all messages after the given date will be selected. If you specify a single date with no dash ( “-”), only messages sent on the given date will be selected.
You can add error margins to absolute dates. An error margin is a sign (+ or -), followed by a digit, followed by one of the units in Table 4.9, “Date units”. As a special case, you can replace the sign by a “*”character, which is equivalent to giving identical plus and minus error margins.
Example: To select any messages two weeks around January 15, 2001, you'd use the following pattern:
Limit to messages matching: ~d 15/1/2001*2w
This type of date is relative to the current date, and may be specified as:
> offset for messages older than offset units
< offset for messages newer than offset units
= offset for messages exactly offset units old
offset is specified as a positive number with one of the units from Table 4.9, “Date units”.
Example: to select messages less than 1 month old, you would use
Limit to messages matching: ~d <1m
All dates used when searching are relative to the
local time zone, so unless you change the
setting of your
$index_format to include a
%[...]
format, these are
not the dates shown in the main index.
=/ "search terms"
invokes server-side search,
passing along the search terms provided. Search results are
constrained by IMAP to be within the current folder. At present this
only supports Gmail's search API IMAP extension. The search language
is entirely up to the mail provider and changes at their discretion.
Using ~/
will silently fail.
For up-to-date information about searching, see: GMail's Support Page. You will need to (once) use a web-browser to visit Settings/Labels and enable "Show in IMAP" for "All Mail". When searching, visit that folder in NeoMutt to most closely match Gmail search semantics.
Table 4.10. GMail Example Patterns
Pattern | Matches |
---|---|
=/ "list:foo.example.org has:attachment is:important"
| the foo.example.org mailing-list per Gmail's definitions, and has an attachment, and has been marked as important |
=/ "{has:purple-star has:yellow-star} older_than:2m"
| is older than two months and has either a purple-star or a yellow-star |
There are times that it's useful to ask NeoMutt to "remember" which message you're currently looking at, while you move elsewhere in your mailbox. You can do this with the “mark-message” operator, which is bound to the “~”key by default. Press this key to enter an identifier for the marked message. When you want to return to this message, press “'”and the name that you previously entered.
(Message marking is really just a shortcut for defining a macro that returns you to the current message by searching for its Message-ID. You can choose a different prefix by setting the $mark_macro_prefix variable.)
Sometimes it is desirable to perform an operation on a group of
messages all at once rather than one at a time. An example might be to
save messages to a mailing list to a separate folder, or to delete all
messages with a given subject. To tag all messages matching a pattern,
use the
<tag-pattern>
function, which is bound to
“shift-T” by default. Or you can select individual messages
by hand using the
<tag-message>
function, which is bound to
“t” by default. See
patterns for NeoMutt's pattern matching
syntax.
Once you have tagged the desired messages, you can use the “tag-prefix” operator, which is the “;”(semicolon) key by default. When the “tag-prefix” operator is used, the next operation will be applied to all tagged messages if that operation can be used in that manner. If the $auto_tag variable is set, the next operation applies to the tagged messages automatically, without requiring the “tag-prefix”.
In
macrosor
push
commands, you can use the
<tag-prefix-cond>
operator. If there are no
tagged messages, NeoMutt will
“eat” the rest of the macro to abort it's execution. NeoMutt
will stop
“eating” the macro when it encounters the
<end-cond>
operator; after this operator the rest
of the macro will be executed as normal.
A hook is a concept found in many other programs which allows you to execute arbitrary commands before performing some operation. For example, you may wish to tailor your configuration based upon which mailbox you are reading, or to whom you are sending mail. In the NeoMutt world, a hook consists of a regular expression or pattern along with a configuration option/command. See:
for specific details on each type of hook available.
If a hook changes configuration settings, these changes remain effective until the end of the current NeoMutt session. As this is generally not desired, a “default” hook needs to be added before all other hooks of that type to restore configuration defaults.
Example 4.5. Specifying a “default” hook
send-hook . 'unmy_hdr From:' send-hook ~C'^b@b\.b$' my_hdr from: c@c.c
In
Example 4.5, “Specifying a
“default” hook”, by default the value of
$from and
$realname is not overridden. When sending
messages either To: or Cc: to
<b@b.b>
, the From: header is changed to
<c@c.c>
.
Hooks that act upon messages ( message-hook, reply-hook, send-hook, send2-hook, save-hook, fcc-hook) are evaluated in a slightly different manner. For the other types of hooks, a regular expression is sufficient. But in dealing with messages a finer grain of control is needed for matching since for different purposes you want to match different criteria.
NeoMutt allows the use of the search pattern language for matching messages in hook commands. This works in exactly the same way as it would when limiting or searching the mailbox, except that you are restricted to those operators which match information NeoMutt extracts from the header of the message (i.e., from, to, cc, date, subject, etc.).
For example, if you wanted to set your return address based upon sending mail to a specific address, you could do something like:
send-hook '~t ^user@work\.com$' 'my_hdr From: John Smith <user@host>'
which would execute the given command when sending mail to user@work.com.
However, it is not required that you write the pattern to match using the full searching language. You can still specify a simple regular expression like the other hooks, in which case NeoMutt will translate your pattern into the full language, using the translation specified by the $default_hook variable. The pattern is translated at the time the hook is declared, so the value of $default_hook that is in effect at that time will be used.
Hooks that match against mailboxes ( folder-hook, mbox-hook) apply both regular expression syntax as well as mailbox shortcut expansion on the regex parameter. There is some overlap between these, so special attention should be paid to the first character of the regex.
# Here, ^ will expand to "the current mailbox" not "beginning of string": folder-hook ^/home/user/Mail/bar "set sort=threads" # If you want ^ to be interpreted as "beginning of string", one workaround # is to enclose the regex in parenthesis: folder-hook (^/home/user/Mail/bar) "set sort=threads" # This will expand to the default save folder for the alias "imap.example.com", which # is probably not what you want: folder-hook @imap.example.com "set sort=threads" # A workaround is to use parenthesis or a backslash: folder-hook (@imap.example.com) "set sort=threads" folder-hook '\@imap.example.com' "set sort=threads"
Keep in mind that mailbox shortcut expansion on the regex parameter takes place when the hook is initially parsed, not when the hook is matching against a mailbox. When NeoMutt starts up and is reading the .neomuttrc, some mailbox shortcuts may not be usable. For example, the "current mailbox" shortcut, ^, will expand to an empty string because no mailbox has been opened yet. NeoMutt will issue an error for this case or if the mailbox shortcut results in an empty regex.
You can alter the environment that NeoMutt passes on to its child processes using the “setenv” and “unsetenv” operators. (N.B. These follow NeoMutt-style syntax, not shell-style!) You can also query current environment values by prefixing a “?”character.
setenv TERM vt100 setenv ORGANIZATION "The NeoMutt Development Team" unsetenv DISPLAY setenv ?LESS
NeoMutt supports connecting to external directory databases such as LDAP, ph/qi, bbdb, or NIS through a wrapper script which connects to NeoMutt using a simple interface. Using the $query_command variable, you specify the wrapper command to use. For example:
set query_command = "mutt_ldap_query.pl %s"
The wrapper script should accept the query on the command-line. It should return a one line message, then each matching response on a single line, each line containing a tab separated address then name then some other optional information. On error, or if there are no matching addresses, return a non-zero exit code and a one line error message.
An example multiple response output:
Searching database ... 20 entries ... 3 matching: me@cs.hmc.edu Michael Elkins mutt dude blong@fiction.net Brandon Long mutt and more roessler@does-not-exist.org Thomas Roessler mutt pgp
There are two mechanisms for accessing the query function of NeoMutt.
One is to do a query from the index menu using the
<query>
function (default: Q). This will prompt
for a query, then bring up the query menu which will list the matching
responses. From the query menu, you can select addresses to create
aliases, or to mail. You can tag multiple addresses to mail, start a new
query, or have a new query appended to the current responses.
The other mechanism for accessing the query function is for address
completion, similar to the alias completion. In any prompt for address
entry, you can use the
<complete-query>
function (default: ^T) to run a
query based on the current address you have typed. Like aliases, NeoMutt
will look for what you have typed back to the last space or comma. If
there is a single response for that query, NeoMutt will expand the address
in place. If there are multiple responses, NeoMutt will activate the query
menu. At the query menu, you can select one or more addresses to be added
to the prompt.
NeoMutt supports reading and writing of four different local mailbox formats: mbox, MMDF, MH and Maildir. The mailbox type is auto detected, so there is no need to use a flag for different mailbox types. When creating new mailboxes, NeoMutt uses the default specified with the $mbox_type variable. A short description of the formats follows.
mbox. This is a widely used mailbox format for UNIX. All messages are stored in a single file. Each message has a line of the form:
From me@cs.hmc.edu Fri, 11 Apr 1997 11:44:56 PST
to denote the start of a new message (this is often referred to as the “From_” line). The mbox format requires mailbox locking, is prone to mailbox corruption with concurrently writing clients or misinterpreted From_ lines. Depending on the environment, new mail detection can be unreliable. Mbox folders are fast to open and easy to archive.
MMDF. This is a variant of the mbox format. Each message is surrounded by lines containing “^A^A^A^A”(four times control-A's). The same problems as for mbox apply (also with finding the right message separator as four control-A's may appear in message bodies).
MH. A radical departure from
mbox and
MMDF, a mailbox consists of a directory and each
message is stored in a separate file. The filename indicates the message
number (however, this is may not correspond to the message number NeoMutt
displays). Deleted messages are renamed with a comma (
“,”) prepended to the filename. NeoMutt detects this type of
mailbox by looking for either
.mh_sequences
or
.xmhcache
files (needed to distinguish normal
directories from MH mailboxes). MH is more robust with concurrent clients
writing the mailbox, but still may suffer from lost flags; message
corruption is less likely to occur than with mbox/mmdf. It's usually
slower to open compared to mbox/mmdf since many small files have to be
read (NeoMutt provides
Section 7.1, “Header Caching”to greatly speed this process up).
Depending on the environment, MH is not very disk-space efficient.
Maildir. The newest of the mailbox formats, used by the Qmail MTA (a replacement for sendmail). Similar to MH, except that it adds three subdirectories of the mailbox: tmp, new and cur. Filenames for the messages are chosen in such a way they are unique, even when two programs are writing the mailbox over NFS, which means that no file locking is needed and corruption is very unlikely. Maildir maybe slower to open without caching in NeoMutt, it too is not very disk-space efficient depending on the environment. Since no additional files are used for metadata (which is embedded in the message filenames) and Maildir is locking-free, it's easy to sync across different machines using file-level synchronization tools.
There are a number of built in shortcuts which refer to specific mailboxes. These shortcuts can be used anywhere you are prompted for a file or mailbox path or in path-related configuration variables. Note that these only work at the beginning of a string.
Table 4.11. Mailbox shortcuts
Shortcut | Refers to... |
---|---|
!
| your $spoolfile(incoming) mailbox |
>
| your $mbox file |
<
| your $record file |
^
| the current mailbox |
- or
!! | the file you've last visited |
~
| your home directory |
= or
+ | your $folder directory |
@alias | to the default save folder as determined by the address of the alias |
For example, to store a copy of outgoing messages in the folder they were composed in, a folder-hook can be used to set $record:
folder-hook . 'set record=^'
NeoMutt has a few configuration options that make dealing with large
amounts of mail easier. The first thing you must do is to let NeoMutt know
what addresses you consider to be mailing lists (technically this does
not have to be a mailing list, but that is what it is most often used
for), and what lists you are subscribed to. This is accomplished through
the use of the
lists and
subscribecommands in your
.neomuttrc
.
Now that NeoMutt knows what your mailing lists are, it can do several things, the first of which is the ability to show the name of a list through which you received a message (i.e., of a subscribed list) in the index menu display. This is useful to distinguish between personal and list mail in the same mailbox. In the $index_format variable, the expando “%L” will print the string “To <list>”when “list” appears in the “To” field, and “Cc <list>”when it appears in the “Cc” field (otherwise it prints the name of the author).
Often times the
“To” and
“Cc” fields in mailing list messages tend to get quite large.
Most people do not bother to remove the author of the message they reply
to from the list, resulting in two or more copies being sent to that
person. The
<list-reply>
function, which by default is bound
to
“L” in the
index menu and
pager, helps reduce the clutter by only replying to
the known mailing list addresses instead of all recipients (except as
specified by
Mail-Followup-To
, see below).
NeoMutt also supports the
Mail-Followup-To
header. When you send a message to a
list of recipients which includes one or several subscribed mailing
lists, and if the
$followup_to option is set, NeoMutt will
generate a Mail-Followup-To header which contains all the recipients to
whom you send this message, but not your address. This indicates that
group-replies or list-replies (also known as
“followups”) to this message should only be sent to the
original recipients of the message, and not separately to you - you'll
receive your copy through one of the mailing lists you are subscribed
to.
Conversely, when group-replying or list-replying to a message which
has a
Mail-Followup-To
header, NeoMutt will respect this header
if the
$honor_followup_to configuration
variable is set. Using
list-reply will in this case also make
sure that the reply goes to the mailing list, even if it's not specified
in the list of recipients in the
Mail-Followup-To
.
When header editing is enabled, you can create a
Mail-Followup-To
header manually. NeoMutt will only
auto-generate this header if it doesn't exist when you send the
message.
The other method some mailing list admins use is to generate a “Reply-To” field which points back to the mailing list address rather than the author of the message. This can create problems when trying to reply directly to the author in private, since most mail clients will automatically reply to the address given in the “Reply-To” field. NeoMutt uses the $reply_to variable to help decide which address to use. If set to ask-yes or ask-no, you will be prompted as to whether or not you would like to use the address given in the “Reply-To” field, or reply directly to the address given in the “From” field. When set to yes, the “Reply-To” field will be used when present.
You can change or delete the “X-Label:”field within NeoMutt using the “edit-label” command, bound to the “y” key by default. This works for tagged messages, too. While in the edit-label function, pressing the <complete> binding (TAB, by default) will perform completion against all labels currently in use.
Lastly, NeoMutt has the ability to sort the mailbox into threads. A thread is a group of messages which all relate to the same subject. This is usually organized into a tree-like structure where a message and all of its replies are represented graphically. If you've ever used a threaded news client, this is the same concept. It makes dealing with large volume mailing lists easier because you can easily delete uninteresting threads and quickly find topics of value.
Working within the confines of a console or terminal window, it is often useful to be able to modify certain information elements in a non-destructive way -- to change how they display, without changing the stored value of the information itself. This is especially so of message subjects, which may often be polluted with extraneous metadata that either is reproduced elsewhere, or is of secondary interest.
subjectrx
pattern
replacement
unsubjectrx
{
*
|
pattern
}
subjectrx
specifies a regular expression
“pattern” which, if detected in a message subject, causes the
subject to be replaced with the
“replacement” value. The replacement is subject to
substitutions in the same way as for the
spam command:
%L
for the text to the left of the match,
%R
for text to the right of the match, and
%1
for the first subgroup in the match (etc). If you
simply want to erase the match, set it to
“%L%R”. Any number of
subjectrx
commands may coexist.
Note this well: the “replacement” value replaces the entire subject, not just the match!
unsubjectrx
removes a given subjectrx from the
substitution list. If
*
is used as the pattern, all substitutions will be
removed.
Example 4.6. Subject Munging
# Erase [rt #12345] tags from Request Tracker (RT) e-mails subjectrx '\[rt #[0-9]+\] *' '%L%R' # Servicedesk is another RT that sends more complex subjects. # Keep the ticket number. subjectrx '\[servicedesk #([0-9]+)\] ([^.]+)\.([^.]+) - (new|open|pending|update) - ' '%L[#%1] %R' # Strip out annoying [listname] prefixes in subjects subjectrx '\[[^\]]*\]:? *' '%L%R'
NeoMutt supports setups with multiple folders, allowing all of them to be monitored for new mail (see Section 14, “Monitoring Incoming Mail”for details).
For Mbox and Mmdf folders, new mail is detected by comparing
access and/or modification times of files: NeoMutt assumes a folder has
new mail if it wasn't accessed after it was last modified. Utilities
like
biff
or
frm
or any other program which accesses the mailbox
might cause NeoMutt to never detect new mail for that mailbox if they do
not properly reset the access time. Other possible causes of NeoMutt not
detecting new mail in these folders are backup tools (updating access
times) or filesystems mounted without access time update support (for
Linux systems, see the
relatime
option).
Contrary to older NeoMutt releases, it now maintains the new mail status of a folder by properly resetting the access time if the folder contains at least one message which is neither read, nor deleted, nor marked as old.
In cases where new mail detection for Mbox or Mmdf folders appears to be unreliable, the $check_mbox_size option can be used to make NeoMutt track and consult file sizes for new mail detection instead which won't work for size-neutral changes.
New mail for Maildir is assumed if there is one message in the
new/
subdirectory which is not marked deleted (see
$maildir_trash). For MH folders, a
mailbox is considered having new mail if there's at least one message
in the
“unseen” sequence as specified by
$mh_seq_unseen. Optionally,
$new_mail_command can be
configured to execute an external program every time new mail is
detected in the current inbox.
NeoMutt does not poll POP3 folders for new mail, it only periodically checks the currently opened folder (if it's a POP3 folder).
For IMAP, by default NeoMutt uses recent message counts provided by the server to detect new mail. If the $imap_idle option is set, it'll use the IMAP IDLE extension if advertised by the server.
The $mail_check_recent option changes whether NeoMutt will notify you of new mail in an already visited mailbox. When set (the default) it will only notify you of new mail received since the last time you opened the mailbox. When unset, NeoMutt will notify you of any new mail in the mailbox.
When in the index menu and being idle (also see $timeout), NeoMutt periodically checks for new mail in all folders which have been configured via the mailboxes command. The interval depends on the folder type: for local/IMAP folders it consults $mail_check and $pop_checkinterval for POP folders.
Outside the index menu the directory browser supports checking
for new mail using the
<check-new>
function which is unbound by
default. Pressing TAB will bring up a menu showing the files specified
by the
mailboxes command, and indicate which contain new
messages. NeoMutt will automatically enter this mode when invoked from the
command line with the
-y
option.
For the pager, index and directory browser menus, NeoMutt contains
the
<buffy-list>
function (bound to
“.”by default) which will print a list of folders with new
mail in the command line at the bottom of the screen.
For the index, by default NeoMutt displays the number of mailboxes with new mail in the status bar, please refer to the $status_format variable for details.
When changing folders, NeoMutt fills the prompt with the first
folder from the mailboxes list containing new mail (if any), pressing
<Space>
will cycle through folders with new
mail. The (by default unbound) function
<next-unread-mailbox>
in the index can be used
to immediately open the next folder with unread mail (if any).
If $mail_check_stats is set, NeoMutt will periodically calculate the unread, flagged, and total message counts for each mailbox watched by the mailboxes command. This calculation takes place at the same time as new mail polling, but is controlled by a separate timer: $mail_check_stats_interval.
The sidebar can display these message counts. See $sidebar_format.
NeoMutt has the ability to dynamically restructure threads that are broken either by misconfigured software or bad behavior from some correspondents. This allows to clean your mailboxes from these annoyances which make it hard to follow a discussion.
Some mailers tend to
“forget” to correctly set the
“In-Reply-To:”and
“References:”headers when replying to a message. This
results in broken discussions because NeoMutt has not enough information
to guess the correct threading. You can fix this by tagging the reply,
then moving to the parent message and using the
<link-threads>
function (bound to & by
default). The reply will then be connected to this parent
message.
You can also connect multiple children at once, tagging them and
using the
<tag-prefix>
command (
“;”) or the
$auto_tag option.
On mailing lists, some people are in the bad habit of starting a
new discussion by hitting
“reply” to any message from the list and changing the
subject to a totally unrelated one. You can fix such threads by using
the
<break-thread>
function (bound by default to
#), which will turn the subthread starting from the current message
into a whole different thread.
RFC1894 defines a set of MIME content types for relaying information about the status of electronic mail messages. These can be thought of as “return receipts.”
To support DSN, there are two variables. $dsn_notify is used to request receipts for different results (such as failed message, message delivered, etc.). $dsn_return requests how much of your message should be returned with the receipt (headers or full message).
When using $sendmail for mail delivery, you need to use either Berkeley sendmail 8.8.x (or greater) a MTA supporting DSN command line options compatible to Sendmail: The -N and -R options can be used by the mail client to make requests as to what type of status messages should be returned. Please consider your MTA documentation whether DSN is supported.
For SMTP delivery using $smtp_url, it depends on the capabilities announced by the server whether NeoMutt will attempt to request DSN or not.
If a message contains URLs, it is efficient to get a menu with all the URLs and start a WWW browser on one of them. This functionality is provided by the external urlview program which can be retrieved at ftp://ftp.mutt.org/mutt/contrib/and the configuration commands:
macro index \cb |urlview\n macro pager \cb |urlview\n
This section documents various features that fit nowhere else.
NeoMutt normalizes all e-mail addresses to the simplest form possible. If an address contains a realname, the form Joe User <joe@example.com>is used and the pure e-mail address without angle brackets otherwise, i.e. just joe@example.com.
This normalization affects all headers NeoMutt generates including aliases.
The folder NeoMutt opens at startup is determined as follows:
the folder specified in the
$MAIL
environment variable if present. Otherwise,
the value of
$MAILDIR
is taken into account. If that isn't
present either, NeoMutt takes the user's mailbox in the mailspool as
determined at compile-time (which may also reside in the home
directory). The
$spoolfile setting overrides this
selection. Highest priority has the mailbox given with the
-f
command line option.
Table of Contents
Quite a bit of effort has been made to make NeoMutt the premier
text-mode MIME MUA. Every effort has been made to provide the functionality
that the discerning MIME user requires, and the conformance to the
standards wherever possible. When configuring NeoMutt for MIME, there are two
extra types of configuration files which NeoMutt uses. One is the
mime.types
file, which contains the mapping of file
extensions to IANA MIME types. The other is the
mailcap
file, which specifies the external commands to
use for handling specific MIME types.
MIME is short for “Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension” and describes mechanisms to internationalize and structure mail messages. Before the introduction of MIME, messages had a single text part and were limited to us-ascii header and content. With MIME, messages can have attachments (and even attachments which itself have attachments and thus form a tree structure), nearly arbitrary characters can be used for sender names, recipients and subjects.
Besides the handling of non-ascii characters in message headers,
to NeoMutt the most important aspect of MIME are so-called MIME types.
These are constructed using a
major and
minor type separated by a forward slash. These
specify details about the content that follows. Based upon these, NeoMutt
decides how to handle this part. The most popular major type is
“
text
”with minor types for plain text, HTML and various other
formats. Major types also exist for images, audio, video and of course
general application data (e.g. to separate cryptographically signed
data with a signature, send office documents, and in general arbitrary
binary data). There's also the
multipart
major type which represents the root of a
subtree of MIME parts. A list of supported MIME types can be found in
Table 5.1, “Supported MIME types”.
MIME also defines a set of encoding schemes for transporting MIME
content over the network:
7bit
,
8bit
,
quoted-printable
,
base64
and
binary
. There're some rules when to choose what for
encoding headers and/or body (if needed), and NeoMutt will in general make
a good choice.
NeoMutt does most of MIME encoding/decoding behind the scenes to form messages conforming to MIME on the sending side. On reception, it can be flexibly configured as to how what MIME structure is displayed (and if it's displayed): these decisions are based on the content's MIME type. There are three areas/menus in dealing with MIME: the pager (while viewing a message), the attachment menu and the compose menu.
When you select a message from the index and view it in the
pager, NeoMutt decodes as much of a message as possible to a text
representation. NeoMutt internally supports a number of MIME types,
including the
text
major type (with all minor types), the
message/rfc822
(mail messages) type and some
multipart
types. In addition, it recognizes a variety
of PGP MIME types, including PGP/MIME and
application/pgp
.
NeoMutt will denote attachments with a couple lines describing them. These lines are of the form:
[-- Attachment #1: Description --] [-- Type: text/plain, Encoding: 7bit, Size: 10000 --]
Where the Description is the description or filename given for the attachment, and the Encoding is one of the already mentioned content encodings.
If NeoMutt cannot deal with a MIME type, it will display a message like:
[-- image/gif is unsupported (use 'v' to view this part) --]
The default binding for
<view-attachments>
is
“v”, which displays the attachment menu for a message. The
attachment menu displays a list of the attachments in a message. From
the attachment menu, you can save, print, pipe, delete, and view
attachments. You can apply these operations to a group of attachments
at once, by tagging the attachments and by using the
<tag-prefix>
operator. You can also reply to
the current message from this menu, and only the current attachment (or
the attachments tagged) will be quoted in your reply. You can view
attachments as text, or view them using the mailcap viewer definition
(the mailcap mechanism is explained later in detail).
Finally, you can apply the usual message-related functions (like
<resend-message>
, and the
<reply>
and
<forward>
functions) to attachments of type
message/rfc822
.
See table Table 9.7, “Default Attachment Menu Bindings”for all available functions.
The compose menu is the menu you see before you send a message. It allows you to edit the recipient list, the subject, and other aspects of your message. It also contains a list of the attachments of your message, including the main body. From this menu, you can print, copy, filter, pipe, edit, compose, review, and rename an attachment or a list of tagged attachments. You can also modifying the attachment information, notably the type, encoding and description.
Attachments appear as follows by default:
- 1 [text/plain, 7bit, 1K] /tmp/neomutt-euler-8082-0 <no description> 2 [applica/x-gunzip, base64, 422K] ~/src/neomutt-0.85.tar.gz <no description>
The
“-”denotes that NeoMutt will delete the file after sending
(or postponing, or canceling) the message. It can be toggled with the
<toggle-unlink>
command (default: u). The next
field is the MIME content-type, and can be changed with the
<edit-type>
command (default: ^T). The next
field is the encoding for the attachment, which allows a binary message
to be encoded for transmission on 7bit links. It can be changed with
the
<edit-encoding>
command (default: ^E). The next
field is the size of the attachment, rounded to kilobytes or megabytes.
The next field is the filename, which can be changed with the
<rename-file>
command (default: R). The final
field is the description of the attachment, and can be changed with the
<edit-description>
command (default: d). See
$attach_format for a full list of
available expandos to format this display to your needs.
To get most out of MIME, it's important that a MIME part's content
type matches the content as closely as possible so that the recipient's
client can automatically select the right viewer for the content.
However, there's no reliable for NeoMutt to know how to detect every
possible file type. Instead, it uses a simple plain text mapping file
that specifies what file extension corresponds to what MIME type. This
file is called
mime.types
.
When you add an attachment to your mail message, NeoMutt searches your
personal
mime.types
file at
$HOME/.mime.types
, and then the system
mime.types
file at
/usr/local/share/neomutt/mime.types
or
/etc/mime.types
Each line starts with the full MIME type, followed by a space and space-separated list of file extensions. For example you could use:
Example 5.1.
mime.types
application/postscript ps eps application/pgp pgp audio/x-aiff aif aifc aiff
A sample
mime.types
file comes with the NeoMutt distribution, and
should contain most of the MIME types you are likely to use.
If NeoMutt can not determine the MIME type by the extension of the
file you attach, it will run the command specified in
$mime_type_query_command.
If that command is not specified, NeoMutt will look at the file. If the file
is free of binary information, NeoMutt will assume that the file is plain
text, and mark it as
text/plain
. If the file contains binary information,
then NeoMutt will mark it as
application/octet-stream
. You can change the MIME type
that NeoMutt assigns to an attachment by using the
<edit-type>
command from the compose menu
(default: ^T), see
Table 5.1, “Supported MIME types”for supported major types. NeoMutt
recognizes all of these if the appropriate entry is found in the
mime.types
file. Non-recognized mime types should only
be used if the recipient of the message is likely to be expecting such
attachments.
Table 5.1. Supported MIME types
MIME major type | Standard | Description |
---|---|---|
application
| yes | General application data |
audio
| yes | Audio data |
image
| yes | Image data |
message
| yes | Mail messages, message status information |
model
| yes | VRML and other modeling data |
multipart
| yes | Container for other MIME parts |
text
| yes | Text data |
video
| yes | Video data |
chemical
| no | Mostly molecular data |
MIME types are not arbitrary, they need to be assigned by IANA.
NeoMutt supports RFC 1524 MIME Configuration, in particular the Unix specific format specified in Appendix A of RFC 1524. This file format is commonly referred to as the “mailcap” format. Many MIME compliant programs utilize the mailcap format, allowing you to specify handling for all MIME types in one place for all programs. Programs known to use this format include Firefox, lynx and metamail.
In order to handle various MIME types that NeoMutt doesn't have built-in support for, it parses a series of external configuration files to find an external handler. The default search string for these files is a colon delimited list containing the following files:
$HOME/.mailcap
$PKGDATADIR/mailcap
$SYSCONFDIR/mailcap
/etc/mailcap
/usr/etc/mailcap
/usr/local/etc/mailcap
where
$HOME
is your home directory. The
$PKGDATADIR
and the
$SYSCONFDIR
directories depend on where NeoMutt is
installed: the former is the default for shared data, the latter for
system configuration files.
The default search path can be obtained by running the following command:
neomutt -nF /dev/null -Q mailcap_path
In particular, the metamail distribution will install a mailcap
file, usually as
/usr/local/etc/mailcap
, which contains some baseline
entries.
A mailcap file consists of a series of lines which are comments, blank, or definitions.
A comment line consists of a # character followed by anything you want.
A blank line is blank.
A definition line consists of a content type, a view command, and any number of optional fields. Each field of a definition line is divided by a semicolon “;”character.
The content type is specified in the MIME standard
“type/subtype” notation. For example,
text/plain
,
text/html
,
image/gif
, etc. In addition, the mailcap format
includes two formats for wildcards, one using the special
“*”subtype, the other is the implicit wild, where you only
include the major type. For example,
image/*
, or
video
will match all image types and video types,
respectively.
The view command is a Unix command for viewing the type
specified. There are two different types of commands supported. The
default is to send the body of the MIME message to the command on
stdin. You can change this behavior by using
%s
as a parameter to your view command. This will
cause NeoMutt to save the body of the MIME message to a temporary file,
and then call the view command with the
%s
replaced by the name of the temporary file. In
both cases, NeoMutt will turn over the terminal to the view program until
the program quits, at which time NeoMutt will remove the temporary file if
it exists. This means that mailcap does
not work out of the box with programs which detach
themselves from the terminal right after starting, like
open
on Mac OS X. In order to nevertheless use these
programs with mailcap, you probably need custom shell scripts.
So, in the simplest form, you can send a
text/plain
message to the external pager more on
standard input:
text/plain; more
Or, you could send the message as a file:
text/plain; more %s
Perhaps you would like to use lynx to interactively view a
text/html
message:
text/html; lynx %s
In this case, lynx does not support viewing a file from standard
input, so you must use the
%s
syntax.
Some older versions of lynx contain a bug where they will
check the mailcap file for a viewer for
text/html
. They will find the line which calls
lynx, and run it. This causes lynx to continuously spawn itself to
view the object.
On the other hand, maybe you don't want to use lynx
interactively, you just want to have it convert the
text/html
to
text/plain
, then you can use:
text/html; lynx -dump %s | more
Perhaps you wish to use lynx to view
text/html
files, and a pager on all other text
formats, then you would use the following:
text/html; lynx %s text/*; more
The interpretation of shell meta-characters embedded in MIME
parameters can lead to security problems in general. NeoMutt tries to
quote parameters in expansion of
%s
syntaxes properly, and avoids risky characters by
substituting them, see the
$mailcap_sanitize variable.
Although NeoMutt's procedures to invoke programs with mailcap seem to be safe, there are other applications parsing mailcap, maybe taking less care of it. Therefore you should pay attention to the following rules:
Keep the %-expandos away from shell quoting.Don't quote them with single or double quotes. NeoMutt does this for you, the right way, as should any other program which interprets mailcap. Don't put them into backtick expansions. Be highly careful with evil statements, and avoid them if possible at all. Trying to fix broken behavior with quotes introduces new leaks — there is no alternative to correct quoting in the first place.
If you have to use the %-expandos' values in context where you
need quoting or backtick expansions, put that value into a shell
variable and reference the shell variable where necessary, as in the
following example (using
$charset
inside the backtick expansion is safe, since
it is not itself subject to any further expansion):
text/test-mailcap-bug; cat %s; copiousoutput; test=charset=%{charset} \ && test "`echo $charset | tr '[A-Z]' '[a-z]'`" != iso-8859-1
In addition to the required content-type and view command fields, you can add semi-colon “;”separated fields to set flags and other options. NeoMutt recognizes the following optional fields:
This flag tells NeoMutt that the command passes possibly
large amounts of text on standard output. This causes NeoMutt to
invoke a pager (either the internal pager or the external pager
defined by the pager variable) on the output of the view
command. Without this flag, NeoMutt assumes that the command is
interactive. One could use this to replace the pipe to
more
in the
lynx -dump
example in the Basic
section:
text/html; lynx -dump %s ; copiousoutput
This will cause lynx to format the
text/html
output as
text/plain
and NeoMutt will use your standard
pager to display the results.
NeoMutt will set the
COLUMNS
environment variable to the width of
the pager. Some programs make use of this environment variable
automatically. Others provide a command line argument that can
use this to set the output width:
text/html; lynx -dump -width ${COLUMNS:-80} %s; copiousoutput
Note that when using the built-in pager, only entries with this flag will be considered a handler for a MIME type — all other entries will be ignored.
NeoMutt uses this flag when viewing attachments with auto_view , in order to decide whether it should honor the setting of the $wait_key variable or not. When an attachment is viewed using an interactive program, and the corresponding mailcap entry has a needsterminal flag, NeoMutt will use $wait_key and the exit status of the program to decide if it will ask you to press a key after the external program has exited. In all other situations it will not prompt you for a key.
This flag specifies the command to use to create a new attachment of a specific MIME type. NeoMutt supports this from the compose menu.
This flag specifies the command to use to create a new attachment of a specific MIME type. This command differs from the compose command in that NeoMutt will expect standard MIME headers on the data. This can be used to specify parameters, filename, description, etc. for a new attachment. NeoMutt supports this from the compose menu.
This flag specifies the command to use to print a specific MIME type. NeoMutt supports this from the attachment and compose menus.
This flag specifies the command to use to edit a specific MIME type. NeoMutt supports this from the compose menu, and also uses it to compose new attachments. NeoMutt will default to the defined $editor for text attachments.
This field specifies the format for the file denoted by
%s
in the command fields. Certain programs
will require a certain file extension, for instance, to
correctly view a file. For instance, lynx will only interpret a
file as
text/html
if the file ends in
.html
. So, you would specify lynx as a
text/html
viewer with a line in the mailcap
file like:
text/html; lynx %s; nametemplate=%s.html
This field specifies a command to run to test whether this mailcap entry should be used. The command is defined with the command expansion rules defined in the next section. If the command returns 0, then the test passed, and NeoMutt uses this entry. If the command returns non-zero, then the test failed, and NeoMutt continues searching for the right entry. Note that the content-type must match before NeoMutt performs the test. For example:
text/html; firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)' ; test=RunningX text/html; lynx %s
In this example, NeoMutt will run the program
RunningX
which will return 0 if the X Window
manager is running, and non-zero if it isn't. If
RunningX
returns 0, then NeoMutt will run
firefox to display the
text/html
object. If RunningX doesn't return
0, then NeoMutt will go on to the next entry and use lynx to
display the
text/html
object.
When searching for an entry in the mailcap file, NeoMutt will
search for the most useful entry for its purpose. For instance, if
you are attempting to print an
image/gif
, and you have the following entries in
your mailcap file, NeoMutt will search for an entry with the print
command:
image/*; xv %s image/gif; ; print= anytopnm %s | pnmtops | lpr; \ nametemplate=%s.gif
NeoMutt will skip the
image/*
entry and use the
image/gif
entry with the print command.
In addition, you can use this with
auto_view
to denote two commands for viewing an attachment, one to be
viewed automatically, the other to be viewed interactively from the
attachment menu using the
<view-mailcap>
function (bound to
“m” by default). In addition, you can then use the test
feature to determine which viewer to use interactively depending on
your environment.
text/html; firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)' ; test=RunningX text/html; lynx %s; nametemplate=%s.html text/html; lynx -dump %s; nametemplate=%s.html; copiousoutput
For
auto_view
, NeoMutt will choose the third entry because of the
copiousoutput
tag. For interactive viewing, NeoMutt
will run the program
RunningX
to determine if it should use the first
entry. If the program returns non-zero, NeoMutt will use the second
entry for interactive viewing. The last entry is for inline display
in the pager and the
<view-attach>
function in the attachment
menu.
Entries with the
copiousoutput
tag should always be specified as the
last one per type. For non-interactive use, the last entry will then
actually be the first matching one with the tag set. For
non-interactive use, only
copiousoutput
-tagged entries are considered. For
interactive use, NeoMutt ignores this tag and treats all entries
equally. Therefore, if not specified last, all following entries
without this tag would never be considered for
<view-attach>
because the
copiousoutput
before them matched already.
The various commands defined in the mailcap files are passed to
the
/bin/sh
shell using the
system(3)
function. Before the command is passed to
/bin/sh -c
, it is parsed to expand various special
parameters with information from NeoMutt. The keywords NeoMutt expands
are:
As seen in the basic mailcap section, this variable is expanded to a filename specified by the calling program. This file contains the body of the message to view/print/edit or where the composing program should place the results of composition. In addition, the use of this keyword causes NeoMutt to not pass the body of the message to the view/print/edit program on stdin.
NeoMutt will expand
%t
to the text representation of the content
type of the message in the same form as the first parameter of
the mailcap definition line, i.e.
text/html
or
image/gif
.
NeoMutt will expand this to the value of the specified parameter from the Content-Type: line of the mail message. For instance, if your mail message contains:
Content-Type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
then NeoMutt will expand
%{charset}
to
“iso-8859-1”. The default metamail mailcap file
uses this feature to test the charset to spawn an xterm using
the right charset to view the message.
This will be replaced by a literal
%
.
NeoMutt does not currently support the
%F
and
%n
keywords specified in RFC 1524. The main purpose
of these parameters is for multipart messages, which is handled
internally by NeoMutt.
This mailcap file is fairly simple and standard:
# I'm always running X :) video/*; xanim %s > /dev/null image/*; xv %s > /dev/null # I'm always running firefox (if my computer had more memory, maybe) text/html; firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)'
This mailcap file shows quite a number of examples:
# Use xanim to view all videos Xanim produces a header on startup, # send that to /dev/null so I don't see it video/*; xanim %s > /dev/null # Send html to a running firefox by remote text/html; firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)'; test=RunningFirefox # If I'm not running firefox but I am running X, start firefox on the # object text/html; firefox %s; test=RunningX # Else use lynx to view it as text text/html; lynx %s # This version would convert the text/html to text/plain text/html; lynx -dump %s; copiousoutput # I use enscript to print text in two columns to a page text/*; more %s; print=enscript -2Gr %s # Firefox adds a flag to tell itself to view jpegs internally image/jpeg;xv %s; x-mozilla-flags=internal # Use xv to view images if I'm running X # In addition, this uses the \ to extend the line and set my editor # for images image/*;xv %s; test=RunningX; \ edit=xpaint %s # Convert images to text using the netpbm tools image/*; (anytopnm %s | pnmscale -xysize 80 46 | ppmtopgm | pgmtopbm | pbmtoascii -1x2 ) 2>&1 ; copiousoutput # Send excel spreadsheets to my NT box application/ms-excel; open.pl %s
Usage:
auto_view
mimetype
[
mimetype
...]unauto_view
{
*
|
mimetype
... }
In addition to explicitly telling NeoMutt to view an attachment with the MIME viewer defined in the mailcap file from the attachments menu, NeoMutt has support for automatically viewing MIME attachments while in the pager.
For this to work, you must define a viewer in the mailcap file
which uses the
copiousoutput
option to denote that it is
non-interactive. Usually, you also use the entry to convert the
attachment to a text representation which you can view in the
pager.
You then use the auto_view configuration command to list the content-types that you wish to view automatically. For instance, if you set it to:
auto_view text/html application/x-gunzip \ application/postscript image/gif application/x-tar-gz
...NeoMutt would try to find corresponding entries for rendering attachments of these types as text. A corresponding mailcap could look like:
text/html; lynx -dump %s; copiousoutput; nametemplate=%s.html image/*; anytopnm %s | pnmscale -xsize 80 -ysize 50 | ppmtopgm | \ pgmtopbm | pbmtoascii ; copiousoutput application/x-gunzip; gzcat; copiousoutput application/x-tar-gz; gunzip -c %s | tar -tf - ; copiousoutput application/postscript; ps2ascii %s; copiousoutput
unauto_view can be used to remove previous entries from the auto_view list. This can be used with message-hook to autoview messages based on size, etc. “ unauto_view*”will remove all previous entries.
The
multipart/alternative
container type only has child
MIME parts which represent the same content in an alternative way. This
is often used to send HTML messages which contain an alternative plain
text representation.
NeoMutt has some heuristics for determining which attachment of a
multipart/alternative
type to display:
First, NeoMutt will check the alternative_order list to determine if one of the available types is preferred. It consists of a number of MIME types in order, including support for implicit and explicit wildcards. For example:
alternative_order text/enriched text/plain text \ application/postscript image/*
Next, NeoMutt will check if any of the types have a defined auto_view , and use that.
Failing that, NeoMutt will look for any text type.
As a last attempt, NeoMutt will look for any type it knows how to handle.
To remove a MIME type from the alternative_order list, use the unalternative_order command.
If you ever lose track of attachments in your mailboxes, NeoMutt's attachment-counting and -searching support might be for you. You can make your message index display the number of qualifying attachments in each message, or search for messages by attachment count. You also can configure what kinds of attachments qualify for this feature with the attachments and unattachments commands.
In order to provide this information, NeoMutt needs to fully MIME-parse all messages affected first. This can slow down operation especially for remote mail folders such as IMAP because all messages have to be downloaded first regardless whether the user really wants to view them or not though using Section 7.2, “Body Caching”usually means to download the message just once.
The syntax is:
attachments
{ + | - }disposition
mime-type
unattachments
{ + | - }disposition
mime-type
attachments
?
disposition is the attachment's Content-Disposition
type — either
inline
or
attachment
. You can abbreviate this to
I
or
A
.
Disposition is prefixed by either a “+”symbol or a “-”symbol. If it's a “+”, you're saying that you want to allow this disposition and MIME type to qualify. If it's a “-”, you're saying that this disposition and MIME type is an exception to previous “+”rules. There are examples below of how this is useful.
mime-type is the MIME type of the attachment you want
the command to affect. A MIME type is always of the format
major/minor
, where
major
describes the broad category of document you're
looking at, and
minor
describes the specific type within that category.
The major part of mime-type must be literal text (or the special token
“
*
”), but the minor part may be a regular expression. (Therefore,
“
*/.*
”matches any MIME type.)
The MIME types you give to the attachments directive are a kind of pattern. When you use the attachments directive, the patterns you specify are added to a list. When you use unattachments, the pattern is removed from the list. The patterns are not expanded and matched to specific MIME types at this time — they're just text in a list. They're only matched when actually evaluating a message.
Some examples might help to illustrate. The examples that are not commented out define the default configuration of the lists.
Example 5.2. Attachment counting
# Removing a pattern from a list removes that pattern literally. It # does not remove any type matching the pattern. # # attachments +A */.* # attachments +A image/jpeg # unattachments +A */.* # # This leaves "attached" image/jpeg files on the allowed attachments # list. It does not remove all items, as you might expect, because the # second */.* is not a matching expression at this time. # # Remember: "unattachments" only undoes what "attachments" has done! # It does not trigger any matching on actual messages. # Qualify any MIME part with an "attachment" disposition, EXCEPT for # text/x-vcard and application/pgp parts. (PGP parts are already known # to NeoMutt, and can be searched for with ~g, ~G, and ~k.) # # I've added x-pkcs7 to this, since it functions (for S/MIME) # analogously to PGP signature attachments. S/MIME isn't supported # in a stock NeoMutt build, but we can still treat it specially here. # attachments +A */.* attachments -A text/x-vcard application/pgp.* attachments -A application/x-pkcs7-.* # Discount all MIME parts with an "inline" disposition, unless they're # text/plain. (Why inline a text/plain part unless it's external to the # message flow?) attachments +I text/plain # These two lines make NeoMutt qualify MIME containers. (So, for example, # a message/rfc822 forward will count as an attachment.) The first # line is unnecessary if you already have "attach-allow */.*", of # course. These are off by default! The MIME elements contained # within a message/* or multipart/* are still examined, even if the # containers themselves don't qualify. #attachments +A message/.* multipart/.* #attachments +I message/.* multipart/.* ## You probably don't really care to know about deleted attachments. attachments -A message/external-body attachments -I message/external-body
Entering the command “ attachments?”as a command will list your current settings in neomuttrc format, so that it can be pasted elsewhere.
Usage:
mime_lookup
mimetype
[
mimetype
...]unmime_lookup
{
*
|
mimetype
... }
NeoMutt's
mime_lookup list specifies a list of MIME types that
should
not be treated according to their mailcap entry. This
option is designed to deal with binary types such as
application/octet-stream
. When an attachment's MIME
type is listed in
mime_lookup, then the extension of the filename will
be compared to the list of extensions in the
mime.types
file. The MIME type associated with this
extension will then be used to process the attachment according to the
rules in the mailcap file and according to any other configuration
options (such as
auto_view) specified. Common usage would be:
mime_lookup application/octet-stream application/X-Lotus-Manuscript
In addition, the
unmime_lookup
command may be used to disable this
feature for any particular MIME type if it had been set, for example, in
a global
.neomuttrc
.
Table of Contents
NeoMutt supports several of optional features which can be enabled or disabled at compile-time by giving the configure script certain arguments. These are listed in the “Optional features” section of the configure --help output.
Which features are enabled or disabled can later be determined
from the output of
neomutt -v
. If a compile option starts with
“+”it is enabled and disabled if prefixed with
“-”. For example, if NeoMutt was compiled using GnuTLS for
encrypted communication instead of OpenSSL,
neomutt -v
would contain:
-openssl +gnutls
NeoMutt optionally supports the IMAP, POP3 and SMTP protocols which
require to access servers using URLs. The canonical syntax for
specifying URLs in NeoMutt is (an item enclosed in
[]
means it is optional and may be omitted):
proto[s]://[username[:password]@]server[:port][/path]
proto is the communication protocol:
imap
for IMAP,
pop
for POP3 and
smtp
for SMTP. If
“s” for
“secure communication” is appended, NeoMutt will attempt to
establish an encrypted communication using SSL or TLS.
Since all protocols supported by NeoMutt support/require
authentication, login credentials may be specified in the URL. This has
the advantage that multiple IMAP, POP3 or SMTP servers may be specified
(which isn't possible using, for example,
$imap_user). The username may contain
the
“@”symbol being used by many mail systems as part of the
login name. The special characters
“/”(
%2F
),
“:”(
%3A
) and
“%”(
%25
) have to be URL-encoded in usernames using the
%
-notation.
A password can be given, too but is not recommended if the URL is specified in a configuration file on disk.
If no port number is given, NeoMutt will use the system's default
for the given protocol (usually consulting
/etc/services
).
The optional path is only relevant for IMAP and ignored elsewhere.
If NeoMutt is compiled with IMAP, POP3 and/or SMTP support, it can also be compiled with support for SSL or TLS using either OpenSSL or GnuTLS ( by running the configure script with the --enable-ssl=...option for OpenSSL or --enable-gnutls=...for GnuTLS). NeoMutt can then attempt to encrypt communication with remote servers if these protocols are suffixed with “s” for “secure communication”.
NeoMutt has POP3 support and has the ability to work with mailboxes located on a remote POP3 server and fetch mail for local browsing.
Remote POP3 servers can be accessed using URLs with the
pop
protocol for unencrypted and
pops
for encrypted communication, see
Section 1.2, “URL Syntax”for details.
Polling for new mail is more expensive over POP3 than locally. For this reason the frequency at which NeoMutt will check for mail remotely can be controlled by the $pop_checkinterval variable, which defaults to every 60 seconds.
POP is read-only which doesn't allow for some features like editing messages or changing flags. However, using Section 7.1, “Header Caching”and Section 7.2, “Body Caching”NeoMutt simulates the new/old/read flags as well as flagged and replied. NeoMutt applies some logic on top of remote messages but cannot change them so that modifications of flags are lost when messages are downloaded from the POP server (either by NeoMutt or other tools).
Another way to access your POP3 mail is the
<fetch-mail>
function (default: G). It allows to
connect to
$pop_host, fetch all your new mail and
place it in the local
$spoolfile. After this point, NeoMutt runs
exactly as if the mail had always been local.
If you only need to fetch all messages to a local mailbox you
should consider using a specialized program, such as
fetchmail(1)
,
getmail(1)
or similar.
NeoMutt has IMAP support and has the ability to work with folders located on a remote IMAP server.
You can access the remote inbox by selecting the folder by its URL
(see
Section 1.2, “URL Syntax”for details) using the
imap
or
imaps
protocol. Alternatively, a pine-compatible
notation is also supported, i.e.
{[username@]imapserver[:port][/ssl]}path/to/folder
Note that not all servers use “/”as the hierarchy separator. NeoMutt should correctly notice which separator is being used by the server and convert paths accordingly.
When browsing folders on an IMAP server, you can toggle whether to look at only the folders you are subscribed to, or all folders with the toggle-subscribed command. See also the $imap_list_subscribed variable.
Polling for new mail on an IMAP server can cause noticeable delays. So, you'll want to carefully tune the $mail_check and $timeout variables. Reasonable values are:
set mail_check=90 set timeout=15
with relatively good results even over slow modem lines.
Note that if you are using mbox as the mail store on UW servers prior to v12.250, the server has been reported to disconnect a client if another client selects the same folder.
As of version 1.2, NeoMutt supports browsing mailboxes on an IMAP server. This is mostly the same as the local file browser, with the following differences:
In lieu of file permissions, NeoMutt displays the string “IMAP”, possibly followed by the symbol “+”, indicating that the entry contains both messages and subfolders. On Cyrus-like servers folders will often contain both messages and subfolders.
For the case where an entry can contain both messages and
subfolders, the selection key (bound to
enter
by default) will choose to descend into the
subfolder view. If you wish to view the messages in that folder,
you must use
view-file
instead (bound to
space
by default).
You can create, delete and rename mailboxes with the
<create-mailbox>
,
<delete-mailbox>
, and
<rename-mailbox>
commands (default
bindings:
C
,
d
and
r
, respectively). You may also
<subscribe>
and
<unsubscribe>
to mailboxes (normally these
are bound to
s
and
u
, respectively).
NeoMutt supports four authentication methods with IMAP servers: SASL, GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, and LOGIN. There is also support for the pseudo-protocol ANONYMOUS, which allows you to log in to a public IMAP server without having an account. To use ANONYMOUS, simply make your username blank or “anonymous”.
SASL is a special super-authenticator, which selects among several protocols (including GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, ANONYMOUS, and DIGEST-MD5) the most secure method available on your host and the server. Using some of these methods (including DIGEST-MD5 and possibly GSSAPI), your entire session will be encrypted and invisible to those teeming network snoops. It is the best option if you have it. To use it, you must have the Cyrus SASL library installed on your system and compile NeoMutt with the --with-sasl flag.
NeoMutt will try whichever methods are compiled in and available on the server, in the following order: SASL, ANONYMOUS, GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, LOGIN.
There are a few variables which control authentication:
$imap_user- controls the username
under which you request authentication on the IMAP server, for all
authenticators. This is overridden by an explicit username in the
mailbox path (i.e. by using a mailbox name of the form
{user@host}
).
$imap_pass- a password which you may preset, used by all authentication methods where a password is needed.
$imap_authenticators- a colon-delimited list of IMAP authentication methods to try, in the order you wish to try them. If specified, this overrides NeoMutt's default (attempt everything, in the order listed above).
Besides supporting traditional mail delivery through a sendmail-compatible program, NeoMutt supports delivery through SMTP.
If the configuration variable $smtp_url is set, NeoMutt will contact the given SMTP server to deliver messages; if it is unset, NeoMutt will use the program specified by $sendmail.
For details on the URL syntax, please see Section 1.2, “URL Syntax”.
The built-in SMTP support supports encryption (the
smtps
protocol using SSL or TLS) as well as SMTP
authentication using SASL. The authentication mechanisms for SASL are
specified in
$smtp_authenticators defaulting
to an empty list which makes NeoMutt try all available methods from
most-secure to least-secure.
Usage:
account-hook
regex
command
If you happen to have accounts on multiple IMAP, POP and/or SMTP servers, you may find managing all the authentication settings inconvenient and error-prone. The account-hook command may help. This hook works like folder-hook but is invoked whenever NeoMutt needs to access a remote mailbox (including inside the folder browser), not just when you open the mailbox. This includes (for example) polling for new mail, storing Fcc messages and saving messages to a folder. As a consequence, account-hook should only be used to set connection-related settings such as passwords or tunnel commands but not settings such as sender address or name (because in general it should be considered unpredictable which account-hook was last used).
Some examples:
account-hook . 'unset imap_user; unset imap_pass; unset tunnel' account-hook imap://host1/ 'set imap_user=me1 imap_pass=foo' account-hook imap://host2/ 'set tunnel="ssh host2 /usr/libexec/imapd"' account-hook smtp://user@host3/ 'set tunnel="ssh host3 /usr/libexec/smtpd"'
To manage multiple accounts with, for example, different values of $record or sender addresses, folder-hook has to be be used together with the mailboxes command.
Example 6.2. Managing multiple accounts
mailboxes imap://user@host1/INBOX folder-hook imap://user@host1/ 'set folder=imap://host1/ ; set record=+INBOX/Sent' mailboxes imap://user@host2/INBOX folder-hook imap://user@host2/ 'set folder=imap://host2/ ; set record=+INBOX/Sent'
In example Example 6.2, “Managing multiple accounts”the folders are defined using mailboxes so NeoMutt polls them for new mail. Each folder-hook triggers when one mailbox below each IMAP account is opened and sets $folder to the account's root folder. Next, it sets $record to the INBOX/Sent folder below the newly set $folder. Please notice that the value the “+” mailbox shortcut refers to depends on the current value of $folder and therefore has to be set separately per account. Setting other values like $from or $signature is analogous to setting $record.
NeoMutt contains two types of local caching: (1)the so-called “header caching” and (2)the so-called “body caching” which are both described in this section.
Header caching is optional as it depends on external libraries, body caching is always enabled if NeoMutt is compiled with POP and/or IMAP support as these use it (body caching requires no external library).
NeoMutt provides optional support for caching message headers for the following types of folders: IMAP, POP, Maildir and MH. Header caching greatly speeds up opening large folders because for remote folders, headers usually only need to be downloaded once. For Maildir and MH, reading the headers from a single file is much faster than looking at possibly thousands of single files (since Maildir and MH use one file per message.)
Header caching can be enabled by configuring one of the database backends. One of tokyocabinet, kyotocabinet, qdbm, gdbm, lmdb or bdb.
If enabled, $header_cache can be used to either point to a file or a directory. If set to point to a file, one database file for all folders will be used (which may result in lower performance), but one file per folder if it points to a directory.
Additionally, $header_cache_backend can be used to specify which backend to use. The list of available backends can be specified at configure time with a set of --with-<backend> options. Currently, the following backends are supported: tokyocabinet, kyotocabinet, qdbm, gdbm, bdb, lmdb.
Both cache methods can be combined using the same directory for storage (and for IMAP/POP even provide meaningful file names) which simplifies manual maintenance tasks.
In addition to caching message headers only, NeoMutt can also cache whole message bodies. This results in faster display of messages for POP and IMAP folders because messages usually have to be downloaded only once.
For configuration, the variable $message_cachedir must point to a directory. There, NeoMutt will create a hierarchy of subdirectories named like the account and mailbox path the cache is for.
For using both, header and body caching, $header_cache and $message_cachedir can be safely set to the same value.
In a header or body cache directory, NeoMutt creates a directory
hierarchy named like:
proto:user@hostname
where
proto
is either
“pop” or
“imap.”Within there, for each folder, NeoMutt stores messages
in single files and header caches in files with the
“.hcache” extension. All files can be removed as needed if
the consumed disk space becomes an issue as NeoMutt will silently fetch
missing items again. Pathnames are always stored in UTF-8
encoding.
For Maildir and MH, the header cache files are named after the MD5 checksum of the path.
NeoMutt does not (yet) support maintenance features for header cache database files so that files have to be removed in case they grow too big. It depends on the database library used for header caching whether disk space freed by removing messages is re-used.
For body caches, NeoMutt can keep the local cache in sync with the remote mailbox if the $message_cache_clean variable is set. Cleaning means to remove messages from the cache which are no longer present in the mailbox which only happens when other mail clients or instances of NeoMutt using a different body cache location delete messages (NeoMutt itself removes deleted messages from the cache when syncing a mailbox). As cleaning can take a noticeable amount of time, it should not be set in general but only occasionally.
You may also have compiled NeoMutt to co-operate with Mixmaster, an anonymous remailer. Mixmaster permits you to send your messages anonymously using a chain of remailers. Mixmaster support in NeoMutt is for mixmaster version 2.04 or later.
To use it, you'll have to obey certain restrictions. Most
important, you cannot use the
Cc
and
Bcc
headers. To tell NeoMutt to use mixmaster, you have to
select a remailer chain, using the mix function on the compose
menu.
The chain selection screen is divided into two parts. In the (larger) upper part, you get a list of remailers you may use. In the lower part, you see the currently selected chain of remailers.
You can navigate in the chain using the
<chain-prev>
and
<chain-next>
functions, which are by default
bound to the left and right arrows and to the
h
and
l
keys (think vi keyboard bindings). To insert a
remailer at the current chain position, use the
<insert>
function. To append a remailer behind
the current chain position, use
<select-entry>
or
<append>
. You can also delete entries from the
chain, using the corresponding function. Finally, to abandon your
changes, leave the menu, or
<accept>
them pressing (by default) the
Return
key.
Note that different remailers do have different capabilities, indicated in the %c entry of the remailer menu lines (see $mix_entry_format). Most important is the “middleman” capability, indicated by a capital “M”: This means that the remailer in question cannot be used as the final element of a chain, but will only forward messages to other mixmaster remailers. For details on the other capabilities, please have a look at the mixmaster documentation.
This feature allows specifying regexes to color attachment
headers just like the mail body would. The headers are the parts
colored by the
attachment
color. Coloring them is useful to
highlight the results of GPGME's signature checks or simply the
mimetype or size of the attachment. Only the part matched by the regex
is colored.
The
attach_headers
color should be used just like the
body
color.
color attach_headers foreground background pattern
# Example NeoMutt config file for the attach-headers-color feature. # Color if the attachment is autoviewed color attach_headers brightgreen default "Autoview" # Color only the brackets around the headers color attach_headers brightyellow default "^\\[--" color attach_headers brightyellow default "--]$" # Color the mime type and the size color attach_headers green default "Type: [a-z]+/[a-z0-9\-]+" color attach_headers green default "Size: [0-9\.]+[KM]" # Color GPGME signature checks color attach_headers brightgreen default "Good signature from.*" color attach_headers brightred default "Bad signature from.*" color attach_headers brightred default "BAD signature from.*" color attach_headers brightred default "Note: This key has expired!" color attach_headers brightmagenta default "Problem signature from.*" color attach_headers brightmagenta default "WARNING: This key is not certified with a trusted signature!" color attach_headers brightmagenta default " There is no indication that the signature belongs to the owner." color attach_headers brightmagenta default "can't handle these multiple signatures" color attach_headers brightmagenta default "signature verification suppressed" color attach_headers brightmagenta default "invalid node with packet of type" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Guillaume Brogi
<gui-gui@netcourrier.com>
The compose-to-sender feature adds a new command to start composing a new email to the sender of the current message. This is not a reply, but a new, separate, message.
It works on tagged messages too, sending one email to all of the senders of the tagged messages.
compose-to-sender adds the following function to NeoMutt. By default, it is not bound to a key.
Table 6.1. compose-to-sender Functions
Menus | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
index,pager |
<compose-to-sender>
| compose a new email to the sender of the current email |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the compose-to-sender feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # FUNCTIONS - shown with an example mapping # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Compose a new email (not a reply) to the sender bind index,pager @ compose-to-sender # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Brian Medley
Guillaume Brogi
<gui-gui@netcourrier.com>
The Compressed Folder feature allows NeoMutt to read mailbox files that are compressed. But it isn't limited to compressed files. It works well with encrypted files, too. In fact, if you can create a program/script to convert to and from your format, then NeoMutt can read it.
The feature adds three hooks to NeoMutt:
open-hook
,
close-hook
and
append-hook
. They define commands to: uncompress a
file; compress a file; append messages to an already compressed
file.
There are some examples of both compressed and encrypted files, later. For now, the documentation will just concentrate on compressed files.
open-hook
pattern
shell-command
close-hook
pattern
shell-command
append-hook
pattern
shell-command
The shell-command must contain two placeholders for filenames:
%f
and
%t
. These represent
“from” and
“to” filenames. These placeholders should be placed inside
single-quotes to prevent unintended shell expansions.
If you need the exact string “%f” or “%t” in your command, simply double up the “%”character, e.g. “%%f” or “%%t”.
Table 6.2. Not all Hooks are Required
Open | Close | Append | Effect | Useful if |
---|---|---|---|---|
Open | - | - | Folder is readonly | The folder is just a backup |
Open | Close | - | Folder is read/write, but the entire folder must be written if anything is changed | Your compression format doesn't support appending |
Open | Close | Append | Folder is read/write and emails can be efficiently added to the end | Your compression format supports appending |
Open | - | Append | Folder is readonly, but can be appended to | You want to store emails, but never change them |
The command:
should return a non-zero exit status on failure
should not delete any files
open-hook regex shell-command
If NeoMutt is unable to open a file, it then looks for
open-hook
that matches the filename.
If your compression program doesn't have a well-defined
extension, then you can use
.
as the regex.
close-hook regex shell-command
When NeoMutt has finished with a compressed mail folder, it will
look for a matching
close-hook
to recompress the file. This hook is
optional.
If the folder has not been modified, the
close-hook
will not be called.
close-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout '%t' > '%f'"
NeoMutt has finished with a folder,
“example.gz”, that it opened with
open-hook
The folder has been modified
NeoMutt has a
close-hook
whose regex matches the filename:
\.gz$
NeoMutt uses the command
gzip -c
to create a new compressed
file
The
close-hook
can also include extra options, e.g.
compression level:
--best
append-hook regex shell-command
When NeoMutt wants to append an email to a compressed mail folder,
it will look for a matching
append-hook
. This hook is
optional.
Using the
append-hook
will save time, but NeoMutt won't be able
to determine the type of the mail folder inside the compressed
file.
NeoMutt will
assume the type to be that of the
$mbox_type
variable. NeoMutt also uses this type for
temporary files.
NeoMutt will only use the
append-hook
for existing files. The
close-hook
will be used for empty, or missing
files.
If your command writes to stdout, it is vital that you use
>>
in the
“append-hook”. If not, data will be lost.
append-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout '%t' >> '%f'"
NeoMutt wants to append an email to a folder,
“example.gz”, that it opened with
open-hook
NeoMutt has an
append-hook
whose regex matches the
filename:
\.gz$
NeoMutt knows the mailbox type from the
$mbox
variable
NeoMutt uses the command
gzip -c
to append to an existing compressed
file
The
append-hook
can also include extra options,
e.g. compression level:
--best
NeoMutt assumes that an empty file is not compressed. In this situation, unset $save_empty, so that the compressed file will be removed if you delete all of the messages.
Encrypted files are decrypted into temporary files which are stored in the $tmpdir directory. This could be a security risk.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the compress feature. # This feature adds three hooks to NeoMutt which allow it to # work with compressed, or encrypted, mailboxes. # The hooks are of the form: # open-hook regex "shell-command" # close-hook regex "shell-command" # append-hook regex "shell-command" # The 'append-hook' is optional. # Handler for gzip compressed mailboxes open-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout --decompress '%f' > '%t'" close-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout '%t' > '%f'" append-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout '%t' >> '%f'" # Handler for bzip2 compressed mailboxes open-hook '\.bz2$' "bzip2 --stdout --decompress '%f' > '%t'" close-hook '\.bz2$' "bzip2 --stdout '%t' > '%f'" append-hook '\.bz2$' "bzip2 --stdout '%t' >> '%f'" # Handler for xz compressed mailboxes open-hook '\.xz$' "xz --stdout --decompress '%f' > '%t'" close-hook '\.xz$' "xz --stdout '%t' > '%f'" append-hook '\.xz$' "xz --stdout '%t' >> '%f'" # Handler for pgp encrypted mailboxes # PGP does not support appending to an encrypted file open-hook '\.pgp$' "pgp -f < '%f' > '%t'" close-hook '\.pgp$' "pgp -fe YourPgpUserIdOrKeyId < '%t' > '%f'" # Handler for gpg encrypted mailboxes # gpg does not support appending to an encrypted file open-hook '\.gpg$' "gpg --decrypt < '%f' > '%t'" close-hook '\.gpg$' "gpg --encrypt --recipient YourGpgUserIdOrKeyId < '%t' > '%f'" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Roland Rosenfeld
<roland@spinnaker.de>
Alain Penders
<Alain@Finale-Dev.com>
Christoph
“Myon” Berg
<myon@debian.org>
Evgeni Golov
<evgeni@debian.org>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
The “Conditional Dates” feature allows you to construct $index_format expressions based on the age of the email.
NeoMutt's default
$index_format
displays email dates in the form:
abbreviated-month day-of-month —
“Jan 14”.
The format is configurable but only per-mailbox. This feature allows you to configure the display depending on the age of the email.
Table 6.3. Potential Formatting Scheme
Email Sent | Format | Example |
---|---|---|
Today |
%H:%M
| 13:23 |
This Month |
%a %d
| Thu 17 |
This Year |
%b %d
| Dec 10 |
Older than 1 Year |
%m/%y
| 06/14 |
For an explanation of the date formatting strings, see
strftime(3).
By carefully picking your formats, the dates can remain unambiguous and compact.
NeoMutt's conditional format strings have the form: (whitespace introduced for clarity)
%? TEST ? TRUE & FALSE ?
The examples below use the test “%[”— the date of the message in the local timezone. They will also work with “%(”— the local time that the message arrived.
The date tests are of the form:
%[nX? TRUE & FALSE ?
“n” is an optional count (defaults to 1 if missing)
“X” is the time period
Table 6.5. Example Date Tests
Test | Meaning |
---|---|
%[y
| This year |
%[1y
| This year |
%[6m
| In the last 6 months |
%[w
| This week |
%[d
| Today |
%[4H
| In the last 4 hours |
We start with a one-condition test.
Table 6.6. Example 1
Test | Date Range | Format String | Example |
---|---|---|---|
%[1m
| This month |
%[%b %d]
| Dec 10 |
Older |
%[%Y-%m-%d]
| 2015-04-23 |
The $index_format string would contain:
%?[1m?%[%b %d]&%[%Y-%m-%d]?
Reparsed a little, for clarity, you can see the test condition and the two format strings.
%?[1m? & ? %[%b %d] %[%Y-%m-%d]
This example contains three test conditions and four date formats.
Table 6.7. Example 2
Test | Date Range | Format String | Example |
---|---|---|---|
%[d
| Today |
%[%H:%M ]
| 12:34 |
%[m
| This month |
%[%a %d]
| Thu 12 |
%[y
| This year |
%[%b %d]
| Dec 10 |
Older |
%[%m/%y ]
| 06/15 |
The $index_format string would contain:
%<[y?%<[m?%<[d?%[%H:%M ]&%[%a %d]>&%[%b %d]>&%[%m/%y ]>
Reparsed a little, for clarity, you can see the test conditions and the four format strings.
%<[y? &%[%m/%y ]> Older %<[m? &%[%b %d]> This year %<[d? &%[%a %d]> This month %[%H:%M ] Today
This a another view of the same example, with some whitespace for clarity.
%<[y? %<[m? %<[d? AAA & BBB > & CCC > & DDD >
AAA = %[%H:%M ] BBB = %[%a %d] CCC = %[%b %d] DDD =
%[%m/%y ]
The “Conditional Dates” feature doesn't have any config of its own. It modifies the behavior of the format strings.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the cond-date feature. # # The default index_format is: # '%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%?l?%4l&%4c?) %s' # # We replace the date field '%{%b %d}', giving: set index_format='%4C %Z %<[y?%<[m?%<[d?%[%H:%M ]&%[%a %d]>&%[%b %d]>&%[%m/%y ]> %-15.15L (%?l?%4l&%4c?) %s' # Test Date Range Format String Example # -------------------------------------------- # %[d Today %[%H:%M ] 12:34 # %[m This month %[%a %d] Thu 12 # %[y This year %[%b %d] Dec 10 # - Older %[%m/%y ] 06/15 # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
strftime(3)
Date parsing doesn't quite do what you expect.
“1w” doesn't mean the
“in the last 7 days”, but
“
this week”. This doesn't match the normal
NeoMutt behavior: for example
~d>1w
means emails dated in the last 7
days.
Aaron Schrab
<aaron@schrab.com>
Eric Davis
<edavis@insanum.com>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Once you encrypt an email to someone you cannot read it. This is good for security, but bad for record-keeping. If you wanted to keep a copy of an encrypted email you could set $fcc_clear.
A better option is to enable $smime_self_encrypt, then set $smime_self_encrypt_as to your personal S/MIME key id.
set smime_self_encrypt = yes set smime_self_encrypt_as = bb345e23.0
Or, if you use PGP, $pgp_self_encrypt, then set $pgp_self_encrypt_as to your personal PGP key id.
set pgp_self_encrypt = yes set pgp_self_encrypt_as = A4AF18C5582473BD35A1E9CE78BB3D480042198E
Table 6.8. encrypt-self Variables
Name | Type | Default |
---|---|---|
smime_self_encrypt
| boolean | no |
smime_self_encrypt_as
| string | (empty) |
pgp_self_encrypt
| boolean | no |
pgp_self_encrypt_as
| string | (empty) |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the encrypt-to-self feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES - shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Save a copy of outgoing email, encrypted to yourself set smime_self_encrypt = "no" # set smime_self_encrypt_as = "SMIME-KEY" # Save a copy of outgoing email, encrypted to yourself set pgp_self_encrypt = "no" set pgp_self_encrypt_as = "PGP-KEY" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Omen Wild
<omen@mandarb.com>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Guillaume Brogi
<gui-gui@netcourrier.com>
Since:NeoMutt 2016-03-07
open_memstream()
,
fmemopen()
from glibc
This feature can be enabled by running
configure
with the option
--enable-fmemopen
The “fmemopen” feature speeds up some searches.
This feature changes a few places where NeoMutt creates temporary files. It replaces them with in-memory buffers. This should improve the performance when searching the header or body using the $thorough_search option.
There are no user-configurable parts.
This feature depends on
open_memstream()
and
fmemopen()
. They are provided by glibc. Without
them, NeoMutt will simply create temporary files.
fmemopen(3)
Julius Plenz
<plenz@cis.fu-berlin.de>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
The “forgotten-attachment” feature provides a new setting for NeoMutt that alerts the user if the message body contains a certain keyword but there are no attachments added. This is meant to ensure that the user does not forget to attach a file after promising to do so in the mail. The attachment keyword will not be scanned in text matched by $quote_regexp.
Table 6.9. forgotten-attachment Variables
Name | Type | Default |
---|---|---|
attach_keyword
| regular expression |
\\<(attach|attached|attachments?)\\>
|
abort_noattach
| quadoption |
no
|
# Example NeoMutt config file for the forgotten-attachment feature. # The 'forgotten-attachment' feature provides a new setting for NeoMutt that # alerts the user if the message body contains a certain regular expression but there are # no attachments added. This is meant to ensure that the user does not forget # to attach a file after promising to do so in the mail. # Ask if the user wishes to abort sending if $attach_keyword is found in the # body, but no attachments have been added # It can be set to: # "yes" : always abort # "ask-yes" : ask whether to abort # "no" : send the mail set abort_noattach = no # Search for the following regular expression in the body of the email # English: attach, attached, attachment, attachments set attach_keyword = "\\<attach(|ed|ments?)\\>" # Nederlands: # set attach_keyword = "\\<(bijvoegen|bijgevoegd|bijlage|bijlagen)\\>" # Deutsch: # set attach_keyword = "\\<(anhängen|angehängt|anhang|anhänge|hängt an)\\>" # Français: # set attach_keyword = "\\<(attaché|attachés|attache|attachons|joint|jointe|joints|jointes|joins|joignons)\\>" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Darshit Shah
<darnir@gmail.com>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Johannes Weißl
<jargon@molb.org>
Steven! Ragnarök
<steven@nuclearsandwich.com>
These hooks are called when global events take place in NeoMutt.
Run a command...
timeout-hook- periodically
startup-hook- when NeoMutt starts up, before opening the first mailbox
shutdown-hook- NeoMutt shuts down, before closing the last mailbox
Since:NeoMutt 2016-08-08
This feature implements a new hook that is called periodically
when NeoMutt checks for new mail. This hook is called every
$timeout
seconds.
Since:NeoMutt 2016-11-25
This feature implements a new hook that is called when NeoMutt first starts up, but before opening the first mailbox. This is most likely to be useful to users of notmuch.
Since:NeoMutt 2016-11-25
This feature implements a hook that is called when NeoMutt shuts down, but before closing the first mailbox. This is most likely to be useful to users of notmuch.
timeout-hook
NEOMUTT-COMMAND
startup-hook
NEOMUTT-COMMAND
shutdown-hook
NEOMUTT-COMMAND
# Example NeoMutt config file for the global hooks feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # COMMANDS - shown with an example argument # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # After $timeout seconds of inactivity, run this NeoMutt command timeout-hook 'exec sync-mailbox' # When NeoMutt first loads, run this NeoMutt command startup-hook 'exec sync-mailbox' # When NeoMutt quits, run this NeoMutt command shutdown-hook 'exec sync-mailbox' # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Armin Wolfermann
<armin@wolfermann.org>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Thomas Adam
<thomas@xteddy.org>
The “ifdef” feature introduces three new commands to NeoMutt and allow you to share one config file between versions of NeoMutt that may have different features compiled in.
ifdef symbol config-command [args...] # If a symbol is defined ifndef symbol config-command [args...] # If a symbol is not defined finish # Finish reading the current file
Here a symbol can be a $variable, <function>, command or compile-time symbol, such as “imap”.
A list of compile-time symbols can be seen in the output of the command
neomutt -v
(in the “Compile options” section).
finish
is particularly useful when combined with
ifndef
. e.g.
# Sidebar config file
ifndef sidebar finish
# Example NeoMutt config file for the ifdef feature. # This feature introduces three useful commands which allow you to share # one config file between versions of NeoMutt that may have different # features compiled in. # ifdef symbol config-command [args...] # ifndef symbol config-command [args...] # finish # The 'ifdef' command tests whether NeoMutt understands the name of # a variable, function, command or compile-time symbol. # If it does, then it executes a config command. # The 'ifndef' command tests whether a symbol does NOT exist. # The 'finish' command tells NeoMutt to stop reading current config file. # If the 'trash' variable exists, set it. ifdef trash 'set trash=~/Mail/trash' # If the 'tag-pattern' function exists, bind a key to it. ifdef tag-pattern 'bind index <F6> tag-pattern' # If the 'imap-fetch-mail' command exists, read my IMAP config. ifdef imap-fetch-mail 'source ~/.neomutt/imap.rc' # If the compile-time symbol 'sidebar' does not exist, then # stop reading the current config file. ifndef sidebar finish # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Cedric Duval
<cedricduval@free.fr>
Matteo F. Vescovi
<mfvescovi@gmail.com>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
The “index-color” feature allows you to specify colors for individual parts of the email index. e.g. Subject, Author, Flags.
First choose which part of the index you'd like to color. Then, if needed, pick a pattern to match.
Note: The pattern does not have to refer to the object you wish to color. e.g.
color index_author red default "~sneomutt"
The author appears red when the subject (~s) contains “neomutt”.
All the colors default to
default
, i.e. unset.
The index objects can be themed using the
color
command. Some objects require a pattern.
color index-object foreground background color index-object foreground background pattern
Table 6.10. Index Colors
Object | Pattern | Highlights |
---|---|---|
index
| yes | Entire index line |
index_author
| yes | Author name, %A %a %F %L %n |
index_collapsed
| no | Number of messages in a collapsed thread, %M |
index_date
| no | Date field |
index_flags
| yes | Message flags, %S %Z |
index_label
| no | Message label, %y %Y |
index_number
| no | Message number, %C |
index_size
| no | Message size, %c %l |
index_subject
| yes | Subject, %s |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the index-color feature. # Entire index line color index white black '.*' # Author name, %A %a %F %L %n # Give the author column a dark grey background color index_author default color234 '.*' # Highlight a particular from (~f) color index_author brightyellow color234 '~fRay Charles' # Message flags, %S %Z # Highlight the flags for flagged (~F) emails color index_flags default red '~F' # Subject, %s # Look for a particular subject (~s) color index_subject brightcyan default '~s\(closes #[0-9]+\)' # Number of messages in a collapsed thread, %M color index_collapsed default brightblue # Date field color index_date green default # Message label, %y %Y color index_label default brightgreen # Message number, %C color index_number red default # Message size, %c %l color index_size cyan default # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Christian Aichinger
<Greek0@gmx.net>
Christoph
“Myon” Berg
<myon@debian.org>
Elimar Riesebieter
<riesebie@lxtec.de>
Eric Davis
<edavis@insanum.com>
Vladimir Marek
<Vladimir.Marek@oracle.com>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
The “initials” feature adds an expando (%I) for an author's initials.
The index panel displays a list of emails. Its layout is controlled by the $index_format variable. Using this expando saves space in the index panel. This can be useful if you are regularly working with a small set of people.
This feature has no config of its own. It adds an expando which can be used in the $index_format variable.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the initials feature. # The 'initials' feature has no config of its own. # It adds an expando for an author's initials, # which can be used in the 'index_format' variable. # The default 'index_format' is: set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%?l?%4l&%4c?) %s' # Where %L represents the author/recipient # This might look like: # 1 + Nov 17 David Bowie Changesbowie ( 689) # 2 ! Nov 17 Stevie Nicks Rumours ( 555) # 3 + Nov 16 Jimi Hendrix Voodoo Child ( 263) # 4 + Nov 16 Debbie Harry Parallel Lines ( 540) # Using the %I expando: set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %I (%?l?%4l&%4c?) %s' # This might look like: # 1 + Nov 17 DB Changesbowie ( 689) # 2 ! Nov 17 SN Rumours ( 555) # 3 + Nov 16 JH Voodoo Child ( 263) # 4 + Nov 16 DH Parallel Lines ( 540) # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Vsevolod Volkov
<vvv@mutt.org.ua>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Since:NeoMutt 2016-10-02
To check if NeoMutt supports Kyoto Cabinet, look for
“kyoto” in the NeoMutt version.
“+hcache” in the compile options
“hcache backend: kyotocabinet” in the NeoMutt version
This feature adds support for using Kyoto Cabinet, the successor to Tokyo Cabinet, as a storage backend for NeoMutt's header cache (hcache). It is enabled at configure time with the --with-kyotocabinet=<path>switch.
Clemens Lang
<neverpanic@gmail.com>
This feature adds a new way of using the
Limit Command. The
<limit-current-thread>
function restricts the
view to just the current thread. Setting the limit (the
l
key) to
“all” will restore the full email list.
Limit-current-thread adds the following function to NeoMutt. By default, it is not bound to a key.
Table 6.11. Limit-Current-Thread Functions
Menus | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
index |
<limit-current-thread>
| Limit view to current thread |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the limit-current-thread feature. # Limit view to current thread bind index <esc>L limit-current-thread # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
David Sterba
<dsterba@suse.cz>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
This feature adds support for using LMDB as a storage backend for NeoMutt's header cache (hcache). It is enabled at configure time with the --with-lmdb=<path>switch.
It is not recommended to store the lmdb database on a shared drive.
Pietro Cerutti
<gahr@gahr.ch>
Jan-Piet Mens
<jp@mens.de>
Clemens Lang
<neverpanic@gmail.com>
This feature allows the user to save outgoing emails in multiple folders.
Folders should be listed separated by commas, but no spaces.
The “fcc” field of an email can be set in two ways:
The <edit-fcc> command in the compose menu (default key: “f”)
Creating a
fcc-hook
in your
.neomuttrc
Omen Wild
<omen@mandarb.com>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
NeoMutt's format strings can contain embedded if-then-else conditions. They are of the form:
%?VAR?TRUE&FALSE?
If the variable “VAR” has a value greater than zero, print the “TRUE” string, otherwise print the “FALSE” string.
e.g.
%?S?Size: %S&Empty?
Which can be read as:
if (%S > 0) { print "Size: %S" } else { print "Empty" }
These conditions are useful, but in NeoMutt they cannot be nested
within one another. This feature uses the notation
%<VAR?TRUE&FALSE>
and allows them to be
nested.
The
%<...>
notation was used to format the current
local time. but that's not really very useful since NeoMutt has no means
of refreshing the screen periodically.
A simple nested condition might be: (Some whitespace has been introduced for clarity)
%<x? %<y? XY & X > & %<y? Y & NONE > > Conditions %<y? XY & X > x>0 XY x>0,y>0 X x>0,y=0
%<x? %<y? XY & X > & %<y? Y & NONE > > Conditions %<y? Y & NONE > x=0 Y x=0,y>0 NONE x=0,y=0
Equivalent to:
if (x > 0) {
if (y > 0) {
print 'XY'
} else {
print 'X'
}
} else {
if (y > 0) {
print 'Y'
} else {
print 'NONE'
}
}
Examples:
set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %s%> %<M?%M Msgs &%<l?%l Lines&%c Bytes>>'
if a thread is folded display the number of messages (%M)
else if we know how many lines in the message display lines in message (%l)
else display the size of the message in bytes (%c)
set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %<M?[%M] %s&%s%* %<l?%l&%c>>'
if a thread is folded display the number of messages (%M) and the subject (%s)
else if we know how many lines are in the message display subject (%s) and the lines in message (%l)
else display the subject (%s) and the size of the message in bytes (%c)
If you wish to use angle brackets < >
in a nested condition, then it's necessary to escape them, e.g.
set index_format='%<M?\<%M\>&%s>'
The “nested-if” feature doesn't have any config of its own. It modifies the behavior of the format strings.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the nested-if feature. # This feature uses the format: '%<VAR?TRUE&FALSE>' for conditional # format strings that can be nested. # Example 1 # if a thread is folded # display the number of messages (%M) # else if we know how many lines in the message # display lines in message (%l) # else display the size of the message in bytes (%c) set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %s%> %<M?%M Msgs &%<l?%l Lines&%c Bytes>>' # Example 2 # if a thread is folded # display the number of messages (%M) # display the subject (%s) # else if we know how many lines in the message # display lines in message (%l) # else # display the size of the message in bytes (%c) set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %<M?[%M] %s&%s%* %<l?%l&%c>>' # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
David Champion
<dgc@uchicago.edu>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
This feature enables the new_mail_command setting, which can be used to execute a custom script (e.g. a notification handler) upon receiving a new mail.
The command string can contain expandos, such as
%n
for the number of new messages. For a complete list, see:
$status_format.
When the notification is sent, the folder of the new mail is no longer known. This is a limitation of NeoMutt. The `%f` expando will show the open folder.
For example in Linux you can use (most distributions already provide notify-send):
set new_mail_command="notify-send --icon='/home/santiago/Pictures/neomutt.png' 'New Email' '%n new messages, %u unread.' &"
And in OS X you will need to install a command line interface for Notification Center, for example terminal-notifier:
set new_mail_command="terminal-notifier -title '%v' -subtitle 'New Mail' -message '%n new messages, %u unread.' -activate 'com.apple.Terminal'"
# Example NeoMutt config file for the new-mail feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES - shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Set the command you want NeoMutt to execute upon the receipt of a new email set new_mail_command = "" # Linux example: # set new_command="notify-send --icon='/home/santiago/Pictures/neomutt.png' 'New Email in %f' '%n new messages, %u unread.' &" # OS X example: # set new_mail_command="terminal-notifier -title '%v' -subtitle 'New Mail in %f' -message '%n new messages, %u unread.' -activate 'com.apple.Terminal'" # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Yoshiki Vazquez-Baeza
<yoshiki@ucsd.edu>
Santiago Torres-Arias
<santiago@nyu.edu>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Reading news via NNTP
NeoMutt can read from a news server using NNTP.
The default news server can be obtained from the
$NNTPSERVER
environment variable or from the
/etc/nntpserver
file. Like in other news readers,
information about the subscribed newsgroups is saved in the file
specified by the
$newsrc variable. You can open a newsgroup
with the function
<change-newsgroup>
The variable $news_cache_dir can be used to point to a directory. NeoMutt will create a hierarchy of subdirectories named like the account and newsgroup the cache is for. The hierarchy is also used to store header cache if NeoMutt was compiled with header cache support.
Table 6.13. NNTP Variables
Name | Type | Default |
---|---|---|
ask_follow_up
| boolean |
no
|
ask_x_comment_to
| boolean |
no
|
catchup_newsgroup
| quad |
ask-yes
|
followup_to_poster
| quad |
ask-yes
|
group_index_format
| string |
%4C %M%N %5s %-45.45f %d
|
inews
| string | (empty) |
mime_subject
| boolean |
yes
|
newsgroups_charset
| string |
utf-8
|
newsrc
| string |
~/.newsrc
|
news_cache_dir
| string |
~/.neomutt
|
news_server
| string | (empty) |
nntp_authenticators
| string | (empty) |
nntp_context
| number |
1000
|
nntp_listgroup
| boolean |
yes
|
nntp_load_description
| boolean |
yes
|
nntp_pass
| string | (empty) |
nntp_poll
| number |
60
|
nntp_user
| string | (empty) |
post_moderated
| quad |
ask-yes
|
save_unsubscribed
| boolean |
no
|
show_new_news
| boolean |
yes
|
show_only_unread
| boolean |
no
|
x_comment_to
| boolean |
no
|
NNTP adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.
Table 6.14. NNTP Functions
Menus | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
browser,index |
<catchup>
| mark all articles in newsgroup as read |
index,pager |
<change-newsgroup>
| open a different newsgroup |
compose |
<edit-followup-to>
| edit the Followup-To field |
compose |
<edit-newsgroups>
| edit the newsgroups list |
compose |
<edit-x-comment-to>
| edit the X-Comment-To field |
attach,index,pager |
<followup-message>
| followup to newsgroup |
index,pager |
<post-message>
| post message to newsgroup |
browser |
<reload-active>
| load list of all newsgroups from NNTP server |
browser |
<subscribe>
| subscribe to current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) |
browser |
<subscribe-pattern>
| subscribe to newsgroups matching a pattern |
browser |
<uncatchup>
| mark all articles in newsgroup as unread |
browser |
<unsubscribe>
| unsubscribe from current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) |
browser |
<unsubscribe-pattern>
| unsubscribe from newsgroups matching a pattern |
index,pager |
<change-newsgroup-readonly>
| open a different newsgroup in read only mode |
attach,index,pager |
<forward-to-group>
| forward to newsgroup |
index |
<get-children>
| get all children of the current message |
index |
<get-parent>
| get parent of the current message |
index |
<reconstruct-thread>
| reconstruct thread containing current message |
index |
<get-message>
| get message with Message-Id |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the nntp feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES - shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- set ask_follow_up = no set ask_x_comment_to = no set catchup_newsgroup = ask-yes set followup_to_poster = ask-yes set group_index_format = '%4C %M%N %5s %-45.45f %d' set inews = '' set mime_subject = yes set newsgroups_charset = utf-8 set newsrc = '~/.newsrc' set news_cache_dir = '~/.neomutt' set news_server = '' set nntp_authenticators = '' set nntp_context = 1000 set nntp_listgroup = yes set nntp_load_description = yes set nntp_pass = '' set nntp_poll = 60 set nntp_user = '' set post_moderated = ask-yes set save_unsubscribed = no set show_new_news = yes set show_only_unread = no set x_comment_to = no # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # FUNCTIONS - shown with an example mapping # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # mark all articles in newsgroup as read bind browser,index y catchup # open a different newsgroup bind index,pager i change-newsgroup # edit the Followup-To field bind compose o edit-followup-to # edit the newsgroups list bind compose N edit-newsgroups # edit the X-Comment-To field bind compose x edit-x-comment-to # followup to newsgroup bind attach,index,pager F followup-message # post message to newsgroup bind index,pager P post-message # load list of all newsgroups from NNTP server bind browser g reload-active # subscribe to current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) bind browser s subscribe # subscribe to newsgroups matching a pattern bind browser S subscribe-pattern # mark all articles in newsgroup as unread bind browser Y uncatchup # unsubscribe from current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) bind browser u unsubscribe # unsubscribe from newsgroups matching a pattern bind browser U unsubscribe-pattern # open a different newsgroup in read only mode bind index,pager \ei change-newsgroup-readonly # forward to newsgroup bind attach,index,pager \eF forward-to-group # get all children of the current message # bind index ??? get-children # get parent of the current message bind index \eG get-parent # reconstruct thread containing current message # bind index ??? reconstruct-thread # get message with Message-Id bind index \CG get-message # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Vsevolod Volkov
<vvv@mutt.org.ua>
Felix von Leitner
<leitner@fefe.de>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Some backends allow to index and tags mail without storing the tags within the mail envelope. Two backends are currently implementing this feature. Notmuch handles them natively and IMAP stores them in custom IMAP keywords.
Table 6.15. Custom tags Variables
Name | Type | Default |
---|---|---|
hidden_tags
| string |
unread,draft,flagged,passed,replied,attachment,signed,encrypted
|
Notmuch adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.
Table 6.16. Notmuch/IMAP Functions
Menus | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
index,pager |
<modify-labels>
| add, remove, or toggle tags: IMAP: edit the tags list Notmuch: [+]<tag> to add, -<tag> to remove, !<tag> to toggle(notmuch) tags. Note: Tab completion of tag names is available |
index,pager |
<modify-labels-then-hide>
| add, remove, or toggle tags IMAP: edit the tags list Notmuch: [+]<tag> to add, -<tag> to remove, !<tag> to toggle labels and then hide or unhide the message by changing the "quasi-deleted" to match if it would be shown when requerying. Normal redisplay rules apply here, so the user must call <sync-mailbox> for the changes to be displayed. Note: Tab completion of tag names is available. |
tag-transforms
tag
transformed-string
{
tag
transformed-string
...}tag-formats
tag
format-string
{
tag
format-string
...}
Adds these to index-color feature:
Table 6.17. Index Colors
Object | Pattern | Highlights |
---|---|---|
index_tag
| yes | an individual message tag, %G, uses tag name |
index_tags
| no | the transformed message tags, %g or %J |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the custom tags feature. # VARIABLES - shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # This variable specifies private notmuch tags which should not be printed # on screen (index, pager). set nm_hidden_tags = "unread,draft,flagged,passed,replied,attachment,signed,encrypted" # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # FUNCTIONS - shown with an example mapping # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # modify (notmuch/imap) tags bind index,pager \` modify-labels # modify (notmuch/imap) tag non-interactively. bind index,pager tt "<modify-labels>!todo\n" "Toggle the 'todo' tag" # modify labels and then hide message # bind index,pager ??? modify-labels-then-hide # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # COMMANDS - shown with an example # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Replace some tags with icons # tag-transforms tag transformed-string { tag transformed-string ...} # tag-transforms "inbox" "i" \ # "unread" "u" \ # "replied" "↻ " \ # "sent" "➥ " \ # "todo" "T" \ # "deleted" "DEL" \ # "invites" "CAL" # The formats must start with 'G' and the entire sequence is case sensitive. # tag-formats tag format-string { tag format-string ...} # tag-formats "inbox" "GI" \ # "unread" "GU" \ # "replied" "GR" \ # "sent" "GS" \ # "todo" "Gt" \ # "deleted" "GD" \ # "invites" "Gi" # Now instead of using '%g' or '%J' in your $index_format, which lists all tags # in a non-deterministic order, you can something like the following which puts # a transformed tag name in a specific spot on the index line: # set index_format='%4C %S %[%y.%m.%d] %-18.18n %?GU?%GU& ? %?GR?%GR& ? %?GI?%GI& ? %s' # The %G formatting sequence may display all tags including tags hidden by # nm_hidden_tags. # # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # COLORS - some unpleasant examples are given # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # These symbols are added to the index-color feature: # an individual message tag, %G, uses tag name # this symbol uses a pattern color index_tag red white "inbox" # the transformed message tags, %g # this symbol does not use a pattern color index_tags green default # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Mehdi Abaakouk
<sileht@sileht.net>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Bernard 'Guyzmo' Pratz
<guyzmo+github+pub@m0g.net>
Since:NeoMutt 2016-03-17
Dependencies:
Notmuch libraries
Notmuch is an email fulltext indexing and tagging engine.
For more information, see: https://notmuchmail.org/
More examples: https://notmuchmail.org/mutttips/
notmuch://[<path>][?<item>=<name>[& ...]]
The <path> is an absolute path to the directory where the
notmuch database is found as returned by
“notmuch config get database.path” command. Note that the
<path> should NOT include
.notmuch
directory name.
If the "<path>" is not defined then
$nm_default_uri
or
$folder
is used, for example:
set nm_default_uri = "notmuch:///home/foo/maildir" virtual-mailboxes "My INBOX" "notmuch://?query=tag:inbox"
query=<string>
See SEARCH SYNTAX in notmuch man page. Don't forget to use operators ( “and”/ “or”) in your queries.
Note that proper URI should not contain blank space and all “bad” chars should be encoded, for example
tag:AAA and tag:BBB
--encoding->
tag:AAA%20and%20tag:BBB
but NeoMutt config file parser is smart enough to accept space in quoted strings. It means that you can use
notmuch:///foo?query=tag:AAA and tag:BBB
in your config files to keep things readable.
For more details about Xapian queries, see: https://xapian.org/docs/queryparser.html
limit=<number>
Restricts number of messages/threads in the result. The default limit is nm_db_limit.
type=<threads|messages>
Reads all matching messages or whole-threads. The default is 'messages' or nm_query_type.
Default:
%2C %?n?%4n/& ?%4m %f
This variable allows you to customize the browser display to
your personal taste. This string is similar to
$index_format, but has its own
set of
printf(3)
-like sequences:
%C | current file number |
%f | folder name (description) |
%m | number of messages in the mailbox * |
%n | number of unread messages in the mailbox * |
%N | N if mailbox has new mail, blank otherwise |
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with character “X” |
%|X | pad to the end of the line with character “X” |
%*X | soft-fill with character “X” as pad |
For an explanation of “soft-fill”, see the $index_format documentation.
* = can be optionally printed if nonzero
Table 6.18. Notmuch Variables
Name | Type | Default |
---|---|---|
nm_db_limit
| number |
0
|
nm_default_uri
| string | (empty) |
nm_exclude_tags
| string | (empty) |
nm_open_timeout
| number |
5
|
nm_query_type
| string |
messages
|
nm_record
| boolean |
no
|
nm_record_tags
| string | (empty) |
nm_unread_tag
| string |
unread
|
vfolder_format
| string |
%6n(%6N) %f
|
virtual_spoolfile
| boolean |
no
|
More variables about tags configuration can be found in Custom backend Tags Feature
Notmuch adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.
Table 6.19. Notmuch Functions
Menus | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
index,pager |
<change-vfolder>
| switch to another virtual folder, a new folder maybe be specified by vfolder description (see virtual-mailboxes) or URI. the default is next vfolder with unread messages |
index,pager |
<entire-thread>
| read entire thread of the current message |
index,pager |
<sidebar-toggle-virtual>
| toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes |
index,pager |
<vfolder-from-query>
| generate virtual folder from notmuch search query. Note: TAB completion of 'tag:' names is available. |
index,pager |
<vfolder-window-forward>
| generate virtual folder by moving the query's time window forward |
index,pager |
<vfolder-window-backward>
| generate virtual folder by moving the query's time window backward |
More functions about tags can be found in Custom backend Tags Feature
virtual-mailboxes
description
notmuch-URI
{
description
notmuch-URI
...}unvirtual-mailboxes
{
*
|
mailbox
... }
More commands about tags can be found in Custom backend Tags Feature
# Example NeoMutt config file for the notmuch feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES - shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # This variable specifies notmuch query limit. set nm_db_limit = 0 # This variable specifies the default Notmuch database in format: # notmuch://<absolute path> set nm_default_uri = "" # The messages tagged with these tags are excluded and not loaded # from notmuch DB to NeoMutt unless specified explicitly. set nm_exclude_tags = "" # This option specifies timeout for Notmuch database. Default is 5 seconds. set nm_open_timeout = 5 # This variable specifies notmuch query type, supported types: 'threads' and # 'messages'. set nm_query_type = messages # Add messages stored to the NeoMutt record (see $record in the NeoMutt docs) also to notmuch DB. If you reply to an email then the new email inherits tags from the original email. set nm_record = no # Tags that should be removed or added to the to the messages stored in the NeoMutt record. example: set record = "~/sent-mails" set nm_record = yes set nm_record_tags = "-inbox,archive,me" set nm_record_tags = "" # This variable specifies notmuch tag which is used for unread messages. set nm_unread_tag = unread # This variable allows you to customize the file browser display for virtual # folders to your personal taste. # %C current folder number # %f folder name (description) # %m number of messages in the mailbox * # %n number of unread messages in the mailbox * # %N N if mailbox has new mail, blank otherwise # %>X right justify the rest of the string and pad with character ``X'' # %|X pad to the end of the line with character ``X'' # %*X soft-fill with character ``X'' as pad set vfolder_format = "%6n(%6N) %f" # When set, NeoMutt will use the first virtual mailbox (see virtual-mailboxes) # as a spoolfile. set virtual_spoolfile = no # setup time window preferences # first setup the duration, and then the time unit of that duration # when set to 0 (the default) the search window feature is disabled set nm_query_window_duration=2 set nm_query_window_timebase="week" # or "hour", "day", "week", "month", "year" # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # FUNCTIONS - shown with an example mapping # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # open a different virtual folder bind index,pager X change-vfolder # read entire thread of the current message bind index,pager + entire-thread # generate virtual folder from query bind index,pager \eX vfolder-from-query # generate virtual folder from query with time window bind index,pager < vfolder-window-backward bind index,pager > vfolder-window-forward # toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes # bind index,pager ??? sidebar-toggle-virtual # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # COMMANDS - shown with an example # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # virtual-mailboxes description notmuch-URI { description notmuch-URI ...} # virtual-mailboxes "Climbing" "notmuch://?query=climbing" # unvirtual-mailboxes { * | mailbox ...} # # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Karel Zak
<kzak@redhat.com>
Chris Mason
<clm@fb.com>
Christoph Rissner
<cri@visotech.at>
David Riebenbauer
<davrieb@liegesta.at>
David Sterba
<dsterba@suse.cz>
David Wilson
<dw@botanicus.net>
Don Zickus
<dzickus@redhat.com>
Eric Davis
<edavis@insanum.com>
Jan Synacek
<jsynacek@redhat.com>
Jeremiah C. Foster
<jeremiah@jeremiahfoster.com>
Josh Poimboeuf
<jpoimboe@redhat.com>
Kirill A. Shutemov
<kirill@shutemov.name>
Luke Macken
<lmacken@redhat.com>
Mantas Mikulėnas
<grawity@gmail.com>
Patrick Brisbin
<pbrisbin@gmail.com>
Philippe Le Brouster
<plb@nebkha.net>
Raghavendra D Prabhu
<rprabhu@wnohang.net>
Sami Farin
<hvtaifwkbgefbaei@gmail.com>
Stefan Assmann
<sassmann@kpanic.de>
Stefan Kuhn
<p_regius@gmx.ch>
Tim Stoakes
<tim@stoakes.net>
Vladimir Marek
<Vladimir.Marek@oracle.com>
Víctor Manuel Jáquez Leal
<vjaquez@igalia.com>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Bernard 'Guyzmo' Pratz
<guyzmo+github+pub@m0g.net>
The “progress” feature shows a visual progress bar on slow tasks, such as indexing a large folder over the net.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the progress feature. # The 'progress' feature provides clear visual feedback for # slow tasks, such as indexing a large folder over the net. # Set the color of the progress bar # White text on a red background color progress white red # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Rocco Rutte
<pdmef@gmx.net>
Vincent Lefevre
<vincent@vinc17.org>
Stefan Kuhn
<wuodan@hispeed.ch>
Karel Zak
<kzak@redhat.com>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
The “quasi-delete” function marks an email that should be hidden from the index, but NOT deleted. The email will disappear from the index when <sync-mailbox> is called.
On its own, this feature isn't very useful. It forms a useful part of the notmuch plugin.
Table 6.21. Quasi-Delete Functions
Menus | Default Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|---|
index,pager | (none) |
<quasi-delete>
| delete from NeoMutt, don't touch on disk |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the quasi-delete feature. # The 'quasi-delete' function marks an email that should be hidden # from the index, but NOT deleted. bind index,pager Q quasi-delete # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Karel Zak
<kzak@redhat.com>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Since:NeoMutt 2016-09-10
Dependencies:None
Adds a reply_with_xorig for NeoMutt configuration files. If enabled, allows to reply to an email using the email address in the first X-Original-To: header of a mail as the From: header of the answer.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the reply-with-xorig feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES - shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Use X-Original-To header to reply when reverse is disabled or no alternate # is found. set reply_with_xorig = "yes" # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Pierre-Elliott Bécue
<becue@crans.org>
The “sensible browser” is a set of small changes to NeoMutt's mailbox browser which make the browser behave in a more predictable way.
The behavior is divided into two use cases: Fixed Order; Variable Order.
This is for users who like their mailboxes in a fixed order, e.g. alphabetical, or unsorted (in the order of the config file).
# Fixed order
set sort_browser="alpha"
set sort_browser="unsorted"
When you first start the browser, e.g.
c?
your current mailbox will be highlighted.
When you navigate to a parent mailbox ( “..”) your old mailbox will be highlighted.
“..”will always be listed at the top, however the rest of the list is sorted.
This is for users who like their mailboxes sorted by a characteristic that changes, e.g. count of new mail, or the size of mailbox.
# Variable order
set sort_browser="reverse-count"
set sort_browser="reverse-size"
When you first start the browser, e.g.
c?
the highlight will be on the first mailbox, e.g.
the one with the most new mail.
When you navigate to a parent mailbox ( “..”) your old mailbox will be highlighted.
“..”will always be listed at the top, however the rest of the list is sorted.
Pierre-Elliott Bécue
<becue@crans.org>
Haakon Riiser
<haakon.riiser@fys.uio.no>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
The Sidebar shows a list of all your mailboxes. The list can be turned on and off, it can be themed and the list style can be configured.
This part of the manual is a reference guide. If you want a simple introduction with examples see the Sidebar Howto. If you just want to get started, you could use the sample Sidebar neomuttrc.
Table 6.23. Sidebar Variables
Name | Type | Default |
---|---|---|
sidebar_delim_chars
| string |
/.
|
sidebar_divider_char
| string |
|
|
sidebar_folder_indent
| boolean |
no
|
sidebar_format
| string |
%B%* %n
|
sidebar_indent_string
| string |
(two spaces) |
sidebar_new_mail_only
| boolean |
no
|
sidebar_next_new_wrap
| boolean |
no
|
sidebar_on_right
| boolean |
no
|
sidebar_short_path
| boolean |
no
|
sidebar_component_depth
| number |
0
|
sidebar_sort_method
| enum |
unsorted
|
sidebar_visible
| boolean |
no
|
sidebar_width
| number |
20
|
For more details, and examples, about the
$sidebar_format
, see the
Sidebar Intro.
Sidebar adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.
Table 6.24. Sidebar Functions
Menus | Function | Description |
---|---|---|
index,pager |
<sidebar-next>
| Move the highlight to next mailbox |
index,pager |
<sidebar-next-new>
| Move the highlight to next mailbox with new mail |
index,pager |
<sidebar-open>
| Open highlighted mailbox |
index,pager |
<sidebar-page-down>
| Scroll the Sidebar down 1 page |
index,pager |
<sidebar-page-up>
| Scroll the Sidebar up 1 page |
index,pager |
<sidebar-prev>
| Move the highlight to previous mailbox |
index,pager |
<sidebar-prev-new>
| Move the highlight to previous mailbox with new mail |
index,pager |
<sidebar-toggle-visible>
| Make the Sidebar (in)visible |
This command specifies mailboxes that will always be displayed in the sidebar, even if $sidebar_new_mail_only is set and the mailbox does not contain new mail.
The “unsidebar_whitelist” command is used to remove a mailbox from the list of whitelisted mailboxes. Use “unsidebar_whitelist *”to remove all mailboxes.
Table 6.25. Sidebar Colors
Name | Default Color | Description |
---|---|---|
sidebar_divider
| default | The dividing line between the Sidebar and the Index/Pager panels |
sidebar_flagged
| default | Mailboxes containing flagged mail |
sidebar_highlight
| underline | Cursor to select a mailbox |
sidebar_indicator
| neomutt
indicator | The mailbox open in the Index panel |
sidebar_new
| default | Mailboxes containing new mail |
sidebar_ordinary
| default | Mailboxes that have no new/flagged mails, etc. |
sidebar_spoolfile
| default | Mailbox that receives incoming mail |
If the
sidebar_indicator
color isn't set, then the default
NeoMutt indicator color will be used (the color used in the index
panel).
Table 6.26. Sidebar Sort
Sort | Description |
---|---|
alpha
| Alphabetically by path |
count
| Total number of messages |
flagged
| Number of flagged messages |
name
| Alphabetically by path |
new
| Number of unread messages |
path
| Alphabetically by path |
unread
| Number of unread messages |
unsorted
| Order of the
mailboxes command |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the sidebar feature. # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # VARIABLES - shown with their default values # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Should the Sidebar be shown? set sidebar_visible = no # How wide should the Sidebar be in screen columns? # Note: Some characters, e.g. Chinese, take up two columns each. set sidebar_width = 20 # Should the mailbox paths be abbreviated? set sidebar_short_path = no # Number of top-level mailbox path subdirectories to truncate for display set sidebar_component_depth = 0 # When abbreviating mailbox path names, use any of these characters as path # separators. Only the part after the last separators will be shown. # For file folders '/' is good. For IMAP folders, often '.' is useful. set sidebar_delim_chars = '/.' # If the mailbox path is abbreviated, should it be indented? set sidebar_folder_indent = no # Indent mailbox paths with this string. set sidebar_indent_string = ' ' # Make the Sidebar only display mailboxes that contain new, or flagged, # mail. set sidebar_new_mail_only = no # Any mailboxes that are whitelisted will always be visible, even if the # sidebar_new_mail_only option is enabled. sidebar_whitelist '/home/user/mailbox1' sidebar_whitelist '/home/user/mailbox2' # When searching for mailboxes containing new mail, should the search wrap # around when it reaches the end of the list? set sidebar_next_new_wrap = no # Show the Sidebar on the right-hand side of the screen set sidebar_on_right = no # The character to use as the divider between the Sidebar and the other NeoMutt # panels. set sidebar_divider_char = '|' # Enable extended buffy mode to calculate total, new, and flagged # message counts for each mailbox. set mail_check_stats # Display the Sidebar mailboxes using this format string. set sidebar_format = '%B%?F? [%F]?%* %?N?%N/?%S' # Sort the mailboxes in the Sidebar using this method: # count - total number of messages # flagged - number of flagged messages # new - number of new messages # path - mailbox path # unsorted - do not sort the mailboxes set sidebar_sort_method = 'unsorted' # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # FUNCTIONS - shown with an example mapping # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Move the highlight to the previous mailbox bind index,pager \Cp sidebar-prev # Move the highlight to the next mailbox bind index,pager \Cn sidebar-next # Open the highlighted mailbox bind index,pager \Co sidebar-open # Move the highlight to the previous page # This is useful if you have a LOT of mailboxes. bind index,pager <F3> sidebar-page-up # Move the highlight to the next page # This is useful if you have a LOT of mailboxes. bind index,pager <F4> sidebar-page-down # Move the highlight to the previous mailbox containing new, or flagged, # mail. bind index,pager <F5> sidebar-prev-new # Move the highlight to the next mailbox containing new, or flagged, mail. bind index,pager <F6> sidebar-next-new # Toggle the visibility of the Sidebar. bind index,pager B sidebar-toggle-visible # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # COLORS - some unpleasant examples are given # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Note: All color operations are of the form: # color OBJECT FOREGROUND BACKGROUND # Color of the current, open, mailbox # Note: This is a general NeoMutt option which colors all selected items. color indicator cyan black # Color of the highlighted, but not open, mailbox. color sidebar_highlight black color8 # Color of the divider separating the Sidebar from NeoMutt panels color sidebar_divider color8 black # Color to give mailboxes containing flagged mail color sidebar_flagged red black # Color to give mailboxes containing new mail color sidebar_new green black # Color to give mailboxes containing no new/flagged mail, etc. color sidebar_ordinary color245 default # -------------------------------------------------------------------------- # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Justin Hibbits
<jrh29@po.cwru.edu>
Thomer M. Gil
<mutt@thomer.com>
David Sterba
<dsterba@suse.cz>
Evgeni Golov
<evgeni@debian.org>
Fabian Groffen
<grobian@gentoo.org>
Jason DeTiberus
<jdetiber@redhat.com>
Stefan Assmann
<sassmann@kpanic.de>
Steve Kemp
<steve@steve.org.uk>
Terry Chan
<tchan@lunar-linux.org>
Tyler Earnest
<tylere@rne.st>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
When viewing an email, the
<skip-to-quoted>
function (by default the
S
key) will scroll past any email headers or quoted
text. Sometimes, a little context is useful.
By setting the
$skip_quoted_offset
variable, you can select how much
of the quoted text is left visible.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the skip-quoted feature. # The 'S' (skip-quoted) command scrolls the pager past the quoted text (usually # indented with '> '. Setting 'skip_quoted_offset' leaves some lines of quoted # text on screen for context. # Show three quoted lines before the reply set skip_quoted_offset = 3 # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
David Sterba
<dsterba@suse.cz>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
The “status-color” feature allows you to theme different parts of the status bar (also when it's used by the index).
Unlike normal color commands,
color status
can now take up to 2 extra parameters
(regex, num).
color
status
foreground
background
[
regex
[
num
]]
With zero parameters, NeoMutt will set the default color for the entire status bar.
With one parameter, NeoMutt will only color the parts matching the regex.
With two parameters, NeoMutt will only color the num'th sub-match of the regex.
# Example NeoMutt config file for the status-color feature. # The 'status-color' feature allows you to theme different parts of # the status bar (also when it's used by the index). # For the examples below, set some defaults set status_format='-%r-NeoMutt: %f [Msgs:%?M?%M/?%m%?n? New:%n?%?o? Old:%o?%?d? Del:%d?%?F? Flag:%F?%?t? Tag:%t?%?p? Post:%p?%?b? Inc:%b?%?l? %l?]---(%s/%S)-%>-(%P)---' set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%?l?%4l&%4c?) %s' set sort=threads set sort_aux=last-date-received # 'status color' can take up to 2 extra parameters # color status foreground background [ regex [ num ]] # 0 extra parameters # Set the default color for the entire status line color status blue white # 1 extra parameter # Set the color for a matching pattern # color status foreground background regex # Highlight New, Deleted, or Flagged emails color status brightred white '(New|Del|Flag):[0-9]+' # Highlight mailbox ordering if it's different from the default # First, highlight anything (*/*) color status brightred default '\([^)]+/[^)]+\)' # Then override the color for one specific case color status default default '\(threads/last-date-received\)' # 2 extra parameters # Set the color for the nth submatch of a pattern # color status foreground background regex num # Highlight the contents of the []s but not the [] themselves color status red default '\[([^]]+)\]' 1 # The '1' refers to the first regex submatch, which is the inner # part in ()s # Highlight the mailbox color status brightwhite default 'NeoMutt: ([^ ]+)' 1 # Search for 'NeoMutt: ' but only highlight what comes after it # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
David Sterba
<dsterba@suse.cz>
Thomas Glanzmann
<thomas@glanzmann.de>
Kirill A. Shutemov
<kirill@shutemov.name>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
The “TLS-SNI” feature adds support for TLS virtual hosting. If your mail server doesn't support this everything will still work normally.
TLS supports sending the expected server hostname during the handshake, via the SNI extension. This can be used to select a server certificate to issue to the client, permitting virtual-hosting without requiring multiple IP addresses.
This has been tested against Exim 4.80, which optionally logs SNI and can perform vhosting.
To verify TLS SNI support by a server, you can use:
openssl s_client -host <imap server> -port <port> -tls1 -servername <imap server>
Jeremy Katz
<katzj@linuxpower.org>
Phil Pennock
<mutt-dev@spodhuis.demon.nl>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Since:NeoMutt 2016-09-10, NeoMutt 1.7.0
If IMAP is enabled, the trash folder will use it wisely
In NeoMutt, when you “delete” an email it is first marked deleted. The email isn't really gone until <sync-mailbox>is called. This happens when the user leaves the folder, or the function is called manually.
After
<sync-mailbox>
has been called the email is
gone forever.
The $trash variable defines a folder in which to keep old emails. As before, first you mark emails for deletion. When <sync-mailbox> is called the emails are moved to the trash folder.
The
$trash
path can be either a full directory, or be
relative to the
$folder variable, like the
mailboxes
command.
Emails deleted from the trash folder are gone forever.
Table 6.30. Trash Functions
Menus | Default Key | Function | Description |
---|---|---|---|
index,pager | (none) |
<purge-message>
| really delete the current entry, bypassing the trash folder |
# Example NeoMutt config file for the 'trash' feature. # This feature defines a new 'trash' folder. # When mail is deleted it will be moved to this folder. # Folder in which to put deleted emails set trash='+Trash' set trash='/home/flatcap/Mail/Trash' # The default delete key 'd' will move an email to the 'trash' folder # Bind 'D' to REALLY delete an email bind index D purge-message # Note: Deleting emails from the 'trash' folder will REALLY delete them. # vim: syntax=neomuttrc
Cedric Duval
<cedricduval@free.fr>
Benjamin Kuperman
<kuperman@acm.org>
Paul Miller
<paul@voltar.org>
Richard Russon
<rich@flatcap.org>
Table of Contents
First of all, NeoMutt contains no security holes included by intention but may contain unknown security holes. As a consequence, please run NeoMutt only with as few permissions as possible. Especially, do not run NeoMutt as the super user.
When configuring NeoMutt, there're some points to note about secure setups so please read this chapter carefully.
Although NeoMutt can be told the various passwords for accounts, please never store passwords in configuration files. Besides the fact that the system's operator can always read them, you could forget to mask it out when reporting a bug or asking for help via a mailing list. Even worse, your mail including your password could be archived by internet search engines, mail-to-news gateways etc. It may already be too late before you notice your mistake.
NeoMutt uses many temporary files for viewing messages, verifying digital signatures, etc. As long as being used, these files are visible by other users and maybe even readable in case of misconfiguration. Also, a different location for these files may be desired which can be changed via the $tmpdir variable.
Message-Id: headers contain a local part that is to be created in a unique fashion. In order to do so, NeoMutt will “leak” some information to the outside world when sending messages: the generation of this header includes a step counter which is increased (and rotated) with every message sent. In a longer running NeoMutt session, others can make assumptions about your mailing habits depending on the number of messages sent. If this is not desired, the header can be manually provided using $edit_headers(though not recommended).
As NeoMutt be can be set up to be the mail client to handle
mailto:
style links in websites, there're security
considerations, too. Arbitrary header fields can be embedded in these
links which could override existing header fields or attach arbitrary
files using
the Attach: pseudoheader. This may
be problematic if the
$edit-headers variable is
unset, i.e. the user doesn't want to see header
fields while editing the message and doesn't pay enough attention to
the compose menu's listing of attachments.
For example, following a link like
mailto:joe@host?Attach=~/.gnupg/secring.gpg
will send out the user's private gnupg keyring to
joe@host
if the user doesn't follow the information
on screen carefully enough.
To prevent these issues, NeoMutt by default only accepts the
Subject
and
Body
headers. Allowed headers can be adjusted with
the
mailto_allow
and
unmailto_allow
commands.
NeoMutt in many places has to rely on external applications or for convenience supports mechanisms involving external applications.
One of these is the
mailcap
mechanism as defined by RFC1524. Details about
a secure use of the mailcap mechanisms is given in
Section 3.2, “Secure Use of Mailcap”.
Besides the mailcap mechanism, NeoMutt uses a number of other external utilities for operation, for example to provide crypto support, in backtick expansion in configuration files or format string filters. The same security considerations apply for these as for tools involved via mailcap.
Table of Contents
NeoMutt's performance when reading mailboxes can be improved in two ways:
For remote folders (IMAP and POP) as well as folders using one-file-per message storage (Maildir and MH), NeoMutt's performance can be greatly improved using header caching. using a single database per folder.
NeoMutt provides the $read_inc and $write_inc variables to specify at which rate to update progress counters. If these values are too low, NeoMutt may spend more time on updating the progress counter than it spends on actually reading/writing folders.
For example, when opening a maildir folder with a few thousand messages, the default value for $read_inc may be too low. It can be tuned on on a folder-basis using folder-hooks:
# use very high $read_inc to speed up reading hcache'd maildirs folder-hook . 'set read_inc=1000' # use lower value for reading slower remote IMAP folders folder-hook ^imap 'set read_inc=100' # use even lower value for reading even slower remote POP folders folder-hook ^pop 'set read_inc=1'
These settings work on a per-message basis. However, as messages may greatly differ in size and certain operations are much faster than others, even per-folder settings of the increment variables may not be desirable as they produce either too few or too much progress updates. Thus, NeoMutt allows to limit the number of progress updates per second it'll actually send to the terminal using the $time_inc variable.
Reading messages from remote folders such as IMAP an POP can be slow especially for large mailboxes since NeoMutt only caches a very limited number of recently viewed messages (usually 10) per session (so that it will be gone for the next session.)
To improve performance and permanently cache whole messages, please refer to NeoMutt's so-called body caching for details.
When searching mailboxes either via a search or a limit action, for some patterns NeoMutt distinguishes between regular expression and string searches. For regular expressions, patterns are prefixed with “~”and with “=”for string searches.
Even though a regular expression search is fast, it's several times slower than a pure string search which is noticeable especially on large folders. As a consequence, a string search should be used instead of a regular expression search if the user already knows enough about the search pattern.
For example, when limiting a large folder to all messages sent to
or by an author, it's much faster to search for the initial part of an
e-mail address via
=Luser@
instead of
~Luser@
. This is especially true for searching message
bodies since a larger amount of input has to be searched.
As for regular expressions, a lower case string search pattern makes NeoMutt perform a case-insensitive search except for IMAP (because for IMAP NeoMutt performs server-side searches which don't support case-insensitivity).
Table of Contents
Running
neomutt
with no arguments will make NeoMutt attempt to read
your spool mailbox. However, it is possible to read other mailboxes and
to send messages from the command line as well.
Table 9.1. Command line options
Option | Description |
---|---|
-A | expand an alias |
-a | attach a file to a message |
-b | specify a blind carbon-copy (BCC) address |
-c | specify a carbon-copy (Cc) address |
-d | log debugging output to ~/.neomuttdebug0 if NeoMutt was compiled
with +debug ; it can range from 1-5 and affects
verbosity (a value of 2 is recommended) |
-D | print the value of all NeoMutt variables to stdout |
-D -S | like -D but hide the value of sensitive variables |
-E | edit the draft (-H) or include (-i) file |
-e | specify a config command to be run after initialization files are read |
-f | specify a mailbox to load |
-F | specify an alternate file to read initialization commands |
-h | print help on command line options |
-H | specify a draft file from which to read a header and body |
-i | specify a file to include in a message composition |
-m | specify a default mailbox type |
-n | do not read the system neomuttrc |
-p | recall a postponed message |
-Q | query a configuration variable |
-R | open mailbox in read-only mode |
-s | specify a subject (enclose in quotes if it contains spaces) |
-v | show version number and compile-time definitions |
-x | simulate the mailx(1) compose mode |
-y | show a menu containing the files specified by the mailboxes command |
-z | exit immediately if there are no messages in the mailbox |
-Z | open the first folder with new message, exit immediately if none |
To read messages in a mailbox
neomutt
[
-nz
] [
-F
neomuttrc
] [
-m
type
] [
-f
mailbox
]
To compose a new message
neomutt
[
-En
] [
-F
neomuttrc
] [
-c
address
] [
-Hi
filename
] [
-s
subject
] [
-a
file
[...]--]
address
|
mailto_url
...
NeoMutt also supports a “batch” mode to send prepared messages. Simply redirect input from the file you wish to send. For example,
neomutt -s "data set for run #2" professor@bigschool.edu < ~/run2.dat
will send a message to
<professor@bigschool.edu>
with a subject of
“data set for run #2”. In the body of the message will be
the contents of the file
“~/run2.dat”.
An include file passed with
-i
will be used as the body of the message. When
combined with
-E
, the include file will be directly edited during
message composition. The file will be modified regardless of whether the
message is sent or aborted.
A draft file passed with
-H
will be used as the initial header and body for the
message. Multipart messages can be used as a draft file. When combined
with
-E
, the draft file will be updated to the final state
of the message after composition, regardless of whether the message is
sent, aborted, or even postponed. Note that if the message is sent
encrypted or signed, the draft file will be saved that way too.
All files passed with
-a
file will be attached as a MIME part to the message.
To attach a single or several files, use
“--”to separate files and recipient addresses:
neomutt -a image.png -- some@one.org
or
neomutt -a *.png -- some@one.org
The
-a
option must be last in the option list.
In addition to accepting a list of email addresses, NeoMutt also
accepts a URL with the
mailto:
schema as specified in RFC2368. This is useful
when configuring a web browser to launch NeoMutt when clicking on mailto
links.
neomutt mailto:some@one.org?subject=test&cc=other@one.org
The following are the commands understood by NeoMutt:
account-hook
regex
command
alternates
[
-group
name
...]
regex
[
regex
...]
unalternates
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
regex
... }
alternative_order
mimetype
[
mimetype
...]
unalternative_order
{
*
|
mimetype
... }
attachments
{ + | - }disposition
mime-type
unattachments
{ + | - }disposition
mime-type
append-hook
pattern
shell-command
auto_view
mimetype
[
mimetype
...]
unauto_view
{
*
|
mimetype
... }
bind
map
key
function
charset-hook
alias
charset
iconv-hook
charset
local-charset
close-hook
pattern
shell-command
open-hook
pattern
shell-command
crypt-hook
regex
keyid
exec
function
[
function
...]
fcc-hook
[!]pattern
mailbox
fcc-save-hook
[!]pattern
mailbox
folder-hook
[!]regex
command
hdr_order
header
[
header
...]
unhdr_order
{
*
|
header
... }
ifdef
item
"config-command
[args]"
macro
menu
key
sequence
[
description
]
mailboxes
mailbox
[
mailbox
...]
unmailboxes
{
*
|
mailbox
... }
mailto_allow
{
*
|
header-field
... }
unmailto_allow
{
*
|
header-field
... }
mbox-hook
[!]regex
mailbox
message-hook
[!]pattern
command
mime_lookup
mimetype
[
mimetype
...]
unmime_lookup
{
*
|
mimetype
... }
push
string
save-hook
[!]pattern
mailbox
reply-hook
[!]pattern
command
send-hook
[!]pattern
command
send2-hook
[!]pattern
command
sidebar_whitelist
mailbox
[
mailbox
...]
unsidebar_whitelist
{
*
|
mailbox
... }
source
filename
subjectrx
pattern
replacement
unsubjectrx
{
*
|
pattern
}
subscribe
[
-group
name
...]
regex
[
regex
...]
unsubscribe
[
-group
name
...] {
*
|
regex
... }
unhook
{
*
|
hook-type
}
Type: quadoption
Default: no
If set to yes, when composing messages containing the regular expression specified by attach_keyword and no attachments ** are given, composition will be aborted. If set to no, composing ** messages as such will never be aborted.
Example:
set attach_keyword = "\\<attach(|ed|ments?)\\>"
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
If set to yes, when composing messages and no subject is given at the subject prompt, composition will be aborted. If set to no, composing messages with no subject given at the subject prompt will never be aborted.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
If set to yes, composition will automatically abort after editing the message body if no changes are made to the file (this check only happens after the first edit of the file). When set to no, composition will never be aborted.
Type: path
Default: “~/.neomuttrc
”
The default file in which to save aliases created by the
<create-alias>
function. Entries added to this file are
encoded in the character set specified by $config_charset if it
is set or the current character set otherwise.
Note: NeoMutt will not automatically source this file; you must explicitly use the “source” command for it to be executed in case this option points to a dedicated alias file.
The default for this option is the currently used neomuttrc file, or “~/.neomuttrc” if no user neomuttrc was found.
Type: string
Default: “%4n %2f %t %-10a %r
”
Specifies the format of the data displayed for the “alias” menu. The
following printf(3)
-style sequences are available:
%a | Alias name |
%f | Flags - currently, a “d” for an alias marked for deletion |
%n | Index number |
%r | Address which alias expands to |
%t | Character which indicates if the alias is tagged for inclusion |
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether 8-bit data is converted to 7-bit using either Quoted- Printable or Base64 encoding when sending mail.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether ANSI color codes in messages (and color tags in rich text messages) are to be interpreted. Messages containing these codes are rare, but if this option is set, their text will be colored accordingly. Note that this may override your color choices, and even present a security problem, since a message could include a line like
[-- PGP output follows ...
and give it the same color as your attachment color (see also $crypt_timestamp).
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, an arrow (“->”) will be used to indicate the current entry in menus instead of highlighting the whole line. On slow network or modem links this will make response faster because there is less that has to be redrawn on the screen when moving to the next or previous entries in the menu.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will use plain ASCII characters when displaying thread and attachment trees, instead of the default ACS characters.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for blind-carbon-copy (Bcc) recipients before editing an outgoing message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for carbon-copy (Cc) recipients before editing the body of an outgoing message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for follow-up groups before editing the body of an outgoing message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for x-comment-to field before editing the body of an outgoing message.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable is a colon-separated list of character encoding schemes for messages without character encoding indication. Header field values and message body content without character encoding indication would be assumed that they are written in one of this list. By default, all the header fields and message body without any charset indication are assumed to be in “us-ascii”.
For example, Japanese users might prefer this:
set assumed_charset="iso-2022-jp:euc-jp:shift_jis:utf-8"
However, only the first content is valid for the message body.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable is a colon-separated list of character encoding schemes for text file attachments. NeoMutt uses this setting to guess which encoding files being attached are encoded in to convert them to a proper character set given in $send_charset.
If unset, the value of $charset will be used instead. For example, the following configuration would work for Japanese text handling:
set attach_charset="iso-2022-jp:euc-jp:shift_jis:utf-8"
Note: for Japanese users, “iso-2022-*” must be put at the head of the value as shown above if included.
Type: string
Default: “%u%D%I %t%4n %T%.40d%> [%.7m/%.10M, %.6e%?C?, %C?, %s]
”
This variable describes the format of the “attachment” menu. The
following printf(3)
-style sequences are understood:
%C | Charset |
%c | Requires charset conversion (“n” or “c”) |
%D | Deleted flag |
%d | Description (if none, falls back to %F) |
%e | MIME content-transfer-encoding |
%f | Filename |
%F | Filename in content-disposition header (if none, falls back to %f) |
%I | Disposition (“I” for inline, “A” for attachment) |
%m | Major MIME type |
%M | MIME subtype |
%n | Attachment number |
%Q | “Q”, if MIME part qualifies for attachment counting |
%s | Size |
%T | Graphic tree characters |
%t | Tagged flag |
%u | Unlink (=to delete) flag |
%X | Number of qualifying MIME parts in this part and its children (please see the “attachments” section for possible speed effects) |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with character “X” |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with character “X” |
%*X | Soft-fill with character “X” as pad |
For an explanation of “soft-fill”, see the $index_format documentation.
Type: regular expression
Default: “\<(attach|attached|attachments?)\>
”
If abort_noattach is not set to no, then the body of the message will be scanned for this regular expression, and if found, you will be prompted if there are no attachments.
Type: string
Default: “\n
”
The separator to add between attachments when operating (saving, printing, piping, etc) on a list of tagged attachments.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If this variable is unset, when operating (saving, printing, piping, etc) on a list of tagged attachments, NeoMutt will concatenate the attachments and will operate on them as a single attachment. The $attach_sep separator is added after each attachment. When set, NeoMutt will operate on the attachments one by one.
Type: string
Default: “On %d, %n wrote:
”
This is the string that will precede a message which has been included
in a reply. For a full listing of defined printf(3)
-like sequences see
the section on $index_format.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
The locale used by strftime(3)
to format dates in the
attribution string. Legal values are the strings your system
accepts for the locale environment variable $LC_TIME
.
This variable is to allow the attribution date format to be customized by recipient or folder using hooks. By default, NeoMutt will use your locale environment, so there is no need to set this except to override that default.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, functions in the index menu which affect a message
will be applied to all tagged messages (if there are any). When
unset, you must first use the <tag-prefix>
function (bound to “;”
by default) to make the next function apply to all tagged messages.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set along with $edit_headers, NeoMutt will skip the initial send-menu (prompting for subject and recipients) and allow you to immediately begin editing the body of your message. The send-menu may still be accessed once you have finished editing the body of your message.
Note: when this option is set, you cannot use send-hooks that depend on the recipients when composing a new (non-reply) message, as the initial list of recipients is empty.
Also see $fast_reply.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will beep when an error occurs.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will beep whenever it prints a message notifying you of new mail. This is independent of the setting of the $beep variable.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether you will be asked to confirm bouncing messages. If set to yes you don't get asked if you want to bounce a message. Setting this variable to no is not generally useful, and thus not recommended, because you are unable to bounce messages.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will include Delivered-To headers when bouncing messages. Postfix users may wish to unset this variable.
Note: On Debian systems, this option is unset by default in /etc/Muttrc.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will place the cursor at the beginning of the current line in menus, even when the $arrow_cursor variable is unset, making it easier for blind persons using Braille displays to follow these menus. The option is unset by default because many visual terminals don't permit making the cursor invisible.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
If this variable is set, NeoMutt will mark all articles in newsgroup as read when you quit the newsgroup (catchup newsgroup).
Type: path
Default: “~/.mutt_certificates
”
This variable specifies the file where the certificates you trust are saved. When an unknown certificate is encountered, you are asked if you accept it or not. If you accept it, the certificate can also be saved in this file and further connections are automatically accepted.
You can also manually add CA certificates in this file. Any server certificate that is signed with one of these CA certificates is also automatically accepted.
Example:
set certificate_file=~/.neomutt/certificates
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, the <change-folder>
function
mailbox suggestion will start at the next folder in your “mailboxes”
list, instead of starting at the first folder in the list.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Character set your terminal uses to display and enter textual data. It is also the fallback for $send_charset.
Upon startup NeoMutt tries to derive this value from environment variables
such as $LC_CTYPE
or $LANG
.
Note: It should only be set in case NeoMutt isn't able to determine the character set used correctly.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will use file size attribute instead of access time when checking for new mail in mbox and mmdf folders.
This variable is unset by default and should only be enabled when new mail detection for these folder types is unreliable or doesn't work.
Note that enabling this variable should happen before any “mailboxes” directives occur in configuration files regarding mbox or mmdf folders because NeoMutt needs to determine the initial new mail status of such a mailbox by performing a fast mailbox scan when it is defined. Afterwards the new mail status is tracked by file size changes.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Note: this option only affects maildir and MH style mailboxes.
When set, NeoMutt will check for new mail delivered while the mailbox is open. Especially with MH mailboxes, this operation can take quite some time since it involves scanning the directory and checking each file to see if it has already been looked at. If this variable is unset, no check for new mail is performed while the mailbox is open.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, NeoMutt will not collapse a thread if it contains any unread messages.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, NeoMutt will not collapse a thread if it contains any flagged messages.
Type: string
Default: “-- NeoMutt: Compose [Approx. msg size: %l Atts: %a]%>-
”
Controls the format of the status line displayed in the “compose”
menu. This string is similar to $status_format, but has its own
set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%a | Total number of attachments |
%h | Local hostname |
%l | Approximate size (in bytes) of the current message |
%v | NeoMutt version string |
See the text describing the $status_format option for more information on how to set $compose_format.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
When defined, NeoMutt will recode commands in rc files from this encoding to the current character set as specified by $charset and aliases written to $alias_file from the current character set.
Please note that if setting $charset it must be done before setting $config_charset.
Recoding should be avoided as it may render unconvertable characters as question marks which can lead to undesired side effects (for example in regular expressions).
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will prompt for confirmation when appending messages to an existing mailbox.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will prompt for confirmation when saving messages to a mailbox which does not yet exist before creating it.
Type: number
Default: 30
Causes NeoMutt to timeout a network connection (for IMAP, POP or SMTP) after this many seconds if the connection is not able to be established. A negative value causes NeoMutt to wait indefinitely for the connection attempt to succeed.
Type: string
Default: “text/plain
”
Sets the default Content-Type for the body of newly composed messages.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not copies of your outgoing messages will be saved for later references. Also see $record, $save_name, $force_name and “fcc-hook”.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to always attempt to PGP encrypt outgoing messages. This is probably only useful in connection to the “send-hook” command. It can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when encryption is not required or signing is requested as well. If $smime_is_default is set, then OpenSSL is used instead to create S/MIME messages and settings can be overridden by use of the smime menu instead. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not NeoMutt may automatically enable PGP encryption/signing for messages. See also $crypt_autoencrypt, $crypt_replyencrypt, $crypt_autosign, $crypt_replysign and $smime_is_default.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to always attempt to cryptographically sign outgoing messages. This can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when signing is not required or encryption is requested as well. If $smime_is_default is set, then OpenSSL is used instead to create S/MIME messages and settings can be overridden by use of the smime menu instead of the pgp menu. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not NeoMutt may automatically enable S/MIME encryption/signing for messages. See also $crypt_autoencrypt, $crypt_replyencrypt, $crypt_autosign, $crypt_replysign and $smime_is_default.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, then you will be prompted for confirmation of keys when using the crypt-hook command. If unset, no such confirmation prompt will be presented. This is generally considered unsafe, especially where typos are concerned.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to automatically enable and disable encryption, based on whether all message recipient keys can be located by NeoMutt.
When this option is enabled, NeoMutt will enable/disable encryption each time the TO, CC, and BCC lists are edited. If $edit_headers is set, NeoMutt will also do so each time the message is edited.
While this is set, encryption can't be manually enabled/disabled. The pgp or smime menus provide a selection to temporarily disable this option for the current message.
If $crypt_autoencrypt or $crypt_replyencrypt enable encryption for a message, this option will be disabled for that message. It can be manually re-enabled in the pgp or smime menus. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL encrypt replies to messages which are encrypted. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL sign replies to messages which are signed.
Note: this does not work on messages that are encrypted and signed! (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL sign replies to messages which are encrypted. This makes sense in combination with $crypt_replyencrypt, because it allows you to sign all messages which are automatically encrypted. This works around the problem noted in $crypt_replysign, that NeoMutt is not able to find out whether an encrypted message is also signed. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will include a time stamp in the lines surrounding PGP or S/MIME output, so spoofing such lines is more difficult. If you are using colors to mark these lines, and rely on these, you may unset this setting. (Crypto only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable controls the use of the GPGME-enabled crypto backends. If it is set and NeoMutt was built with gpgme support, the gpgme code for S/MIME and PGP will be used instead of the classic code. Note that you need to set this option in .neomuttrc; it won't have any effect when used interactively.
Note that the GPGME backend does not support creating old-style inline (traditional) PGP encrypted or signed messages (see $pgp_autoinline).
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether NeoMutt uses PKA (see http://www.g10code.de/docs/pka-intro.de.pdf) during signature verification (only supported by the GPGME backend).
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
If “yes”, always attempt to verify PGP or S/MIME signatures. If “ask-*”, ask whether or not to verify the signature. If “no”, never attempt to verify cryptographic signatures. (Crypto only)
Type: string
Default: “!%a, %b %d, %Y at %I:%M:%S%p %Z
”
This variable controls the format of the date printed by the “%d”
sequence in $index_format. This is passed to the strftime(3)
function to process the date, see the man page for the proper syntax.
Unless the first character in the string is a bang (“!”), the month and week day names are expanded according to the locale. If the first character in the string is a bang, the bang is discarded, and the month and week day names in the rest of the string are expanded in the C locale (that is in US English).
Type: number
Default: 0
The debug level. Note: to debug the early startup process (before the configuration is loaded), “-d” neomutt argument must be used. debug_level/debug_file are ignored until it's read from the configuration file.
Type: path
Default: “~/.neomuttdebug
”
The location prefix of the debug file, 0 is append to the debug file Old debug files are renamed with the prefix 1, 2, 3 and 4. See “debug_level” for more detail.
Type: string
Default: “~f %s !~P | (~P ~C %s)
”
This variable controls how “message-hook”, “reply-hook”, “send-hook”, “send2-hook”, “save-hook”, and “fcc-hook” will be interpreted if they are specified with only a simple regex, instead of a matching pattern. The hooks are expanded when they are declared, so a hook will be interpreted according to the value of this variable at the time the hook is declared.
The default value matches if the message is either from a user matching the regular expression given, or if it is from you (if the from address matches “alternates”) and is to or cc'ed to a user matching the given regular expression.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether or not messages are really deleted when closing or synchronizing a mailbox. If set to yes, messages marked for deleting will automatically be purged without prompting. If set to no, messages marked for deletion will be kept in the mailbox.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If this option is set, NeoMutt will untag messages when marking them for deletion. This applies when you either explicitly delete a message, or when you save it to another folder.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If this option is set, NeoMutt's received-attachments menu will not show the subparts of individual messages in a multipart/digest. To see these subparts, press “v” on that menu.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
When set, specifies a command used to filter messages. When a message is viewed it is passed as standard input to $display_filter, and the filtered message is read from the standard output.
When preparing the message, NeoMutt inserts some escape sequences into the
text. They are of the form: <esc>]9;XXX<bel>
where "XXX" is a random
64-bit number.
If these escape sequences interfere with your filter, they can be removed
using a tool like ansifilter
or sed 's/^\x1b]9;[0-9]\+\x7//'
If they are removed, then PGP and MIME headers will no longer be coloured.
This can be fixed by adding this to your config:
color body magenta default '^\[-- .* --\]$'
.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable sets the request for when notification is returned. The string consists of a comma separated list (no spaces!) of one or more of the following: never, to never request notification, failure, to request notification on transmission failure, delay, to be notified of message delays, success, to be notified of successful transmission.
Example:
set dsn_notify="failure,delay"
Note: when using $sendmail for delivery, you should not enable
this unless you are either using Sendmail 8.8.x or greater or a MTA
providing a sendmail(1)
-compatible interface supporting the -N
option
for DSN. For SMTP delivery, DSN support is auto-detected so that it
depends on the server whether DSN will be used or not.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable controls how much of your message is returned in DSN messages. It may be set to either hdrs to return just the message header, or full to return the full message.
Example:
set dsn_return=hdrs
Note: when using $sendmail for delivery, you should not enable
this unless you are either using Sendmail 8.8.x or greater or a MTA
providing a sendmail(1)
-compatible interface supporting the -R
option
for DSN. For SMTP delivery, DSN support is auto-detected so that it
depends on the server whether DSN will be used or not.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls whether NeoMutt, when $sort is set to threads, threads messages with the same Message-Id together. If it is set, it will indicate that it thinks they are duplicates of each other with an equals sign in the thread tree.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This option allows you to edit the header of your outgoing messages along with the body of your message.
Although the compose menu may have localized header labels, the labels passed to your editor will be standard RFC2822 headers, (e.g. To:, Cc:, Subject:). Headers added in your editor must also be RFC2822 headers, or one of the pseudo headers listed in “edit-header”. NeoMutt will not understand localized header labels, just as it would not when parsing an actual email.
Note that changes made to the References: and Date: headers are ignored for interoperability reasons.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies which editor is used by NeoMutt.
It defaults to the value of the $VISUAL
, or $EDITOR
, environment
variable, or to the string “/usr/bin/editor” if neither of those are set.
The $editor
string may contain a %s escape, which will be replaced by the name
of the file to be edited. If the %s escape does not appear in $editor
, a
space and the name to be edited are appended.
The resulting string is then executed by running
sh -c 'string'
where string is the expansion of $editor
described above.
Type: string
Default: “Re: your mail
”
This variable specifies the subject to be used when replying to an email with an empty subject. It defaults to "Re: your mail".
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will quoted-printable encode messages when they contain the string “From ” (note the trailing space) in the beginning of a line. This is useful to avoid the tampering certain mail delivery and transport agents tend to do with messages (in order to prevent tools from misinterpreting the line as a mbox message separator).
Type: e-mail address
Default: (empty)
Manually sets the envelope sender for outgoing messages. This value is ignored if $use_envelope_from is unset.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the initial prompt for recipients and subject are skipped when replying to messages, and the initial prompt for subject is skipped when forwarding messages.
Note: this variable has no effect when the $autoedit variable is set.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not attachments on outgoing messages are saved along with the main body of your message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, FCCs will be stored unencrypted and unsigned, even when the actual message is encrypted and/or signed. (PGP only)
Type: path
Default: “~/Mail
”
Specifies the default location of your mailboxes. A “+” or “=” at the beginning of a pathname will be expanded to the value of this variable. Note that if you change this variable (from the default) value you need to make sure that the assignment occurs before you use “+” or “=” for any other variables since expansion takes place when handling the “mailboxes” command.
Type: string
Default: “%2C %t %N %F %2l %-8.8u %-8.8g %8s %d %f
”
This variable allows you to customize the file browser display to your
personal taste. This string is similar to $index_format, but has
its own set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%C | Current file number |
%d | Date/time folder was last modified |
%D | Date/time folder was last modified using $date_format. |
%f | Filename (“/” is appended to directory names, “@” to symbolic links and “*” to executable files) |
%F | File permissions |
%g | Group name (or numeric gid, if missing) |
%l | Number of hard links |
%m | Number of messages in the mailbox * |
%n | Number of unread messages in the mailbox * |
%N | “N” if mailbox has new mail, blank otherwise |
%s | Size in bytes |
%t | “*” if the file is tagged, blank otherwise |
%u | Owner name (or numeric uid, if missing) |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with character “X” |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with character “X” |
%*X | Soft-fill with character “X” as pad |
For an explanation of “soft-fill”, see the $index_format documentation.
* = can be optionally printed if nonzero
%m, %n, and %N only work for monitored mailboxes. %m requires $mail_check_stats to be set. %n requires $mail_check_stats to be set (except for IMAP mailboxes).
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether or not the “Mail-Followup-To:” header field is generated when sending mail. When set, NeoMutt will generate this field when you are replying to a known mailing list, specified with the “subscribe” or “lists” commands.
This field has two purposes. First, preventing you from receiving duplicate copies of replies to messages which you send to mailing lists, and second, ensuring that you do get a reply separately for any messages sent to known lists to which you are not subscribed.
The header will contain only the list's address for subscribed lists, and both the list address and your own email address for unsubscribed lists. Without this header, a group reply to your message sent to a subscribed list will be sent to both the list and your address, resulting in two copies of the same email for you.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
If this variable is set and the keyword "poster" is present in Followup-To header, follow-up to newsgroup function is not permitted. The message will be mailed to the submitter of the message via mail.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable is similar to $save_name, except that NeoMutt will store a copy of your outgoing message by the username of the address you are sending to even if that mailbox does not exist.
Also see the $record variable.
Type: string
Default: “----- Forwarded message from %f -----
”
This is the string that will precede a message which has been forwarded
in the main body of a message (when $mime_forward is unset).
For a full listing of defined printf(3)
-like sequences see
the section on $index_format. See also $attribution_locale.
Type: string
Default: “----- End forwarded message -----
”
This is the string that will follow a message which has been forwarded
in the main body of a message (when $mime_forward is unset).
For a full listing of defined printf(3)
-like sequences see
the section on $index_format. See also $attribution_locale.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls the decoding of complex MIME messages into text/plain
when
forwarding a message. The message header is also RFC2047 decoded.
This variable is only used, if $mime_forward is unset,
otherwise $mime_forward_decode is used instead.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls the handling of encrypted messages when forwarding a message. When set, the outer layer of encryption is stripped off. This variable is only used if $mime_forward is set and $mime_forward_decode is unset. (PGP only)
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
This quadoption controls whether or not the user is automatically placed in the editor when forwarding messages. For those who always want to forward with no modification, use a setting of “no”.
Type: string
Default: “[%a: %s]
”
This variable controls the default subject when forwarding a message. It uses the same format sequences as the $index_format variable.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, forwarded messages included in the main body of the message (when $mime_forward is unset) will be quoted using $indent_string.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, forwarded messages set the “In-Reply-To:” and “References:” headers in the same way as normal replies would. Hence the forwarded message becomes part of the original thread instead of starting a new one.
Type: e-mail address
Default: (empty)
When set, this variable contains a default from address. It can be overridden using “my_hdr” (including from a “send-hook”) and $reverse_name. This variable is ignored if $use_from is unset.
This setting defaults to the contents of the environment variable $EMAIL
.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Controls the character used to prefix the %F and %L fields in the index.
Character | Description |
1 | Mail is written by you and has a To address, or has a known mailing list in the To address. |
2 | Mail is written by you and has a Cc address, or has a known mailing list in the Cc address. |
3 | Mail is written by you and has a Bcc address. |
4 | All remaining cases. |
If this is empty or unset (default), the traditional long "To ", "Cc " and "Bcc " prefixes are used. If set but too short to include a character for a particular case, a single space will be prepended to the field. To prevent any prefix at all from being added in a particular case, use the special value CR (aka ^M) for the corresponding character.
This slightly odd interface is necessitated by NeoMutt's handling of string variables; one cannot tell a variable that is unset from one that is set to the empty string.
Type: regular expression
Default: “^[^,]*
”
A regular expression used by NeoMutt to parse the GECOS field of a password
entry when expanding the alias. The default value
will return the string up to the first “,” encountered.
If the GECOS field contains a string like “lastname, firstname” then you
should set it to “.*
”.
This can be useful if you see the following behavior: you address an e-mail to user ID “stevef” whose full name is “Steve Franklin”. If NeoMutt expands “stevef” to “"Franklin" stevef@foo.bar” then you should set the $gecos_mask to a regular expression that will match the whole name so NeoMutt will expand “Franklin” to “Franklin, Steve”.
Type: string
Default: “%4C %M%N %5s %-45.45f %d
”
This variable allows you to customize the newsgroup browser display to your personal taste. This string is similar to “index_format”, but has its own set of printf()-like sequences:
%C | Current newsgroup number |
%d | Description of newsgroup (becomes from server) |
%f | Newsgroup name |
%M | - if newsgroup not allowed for direct post (moderated for example) |
%N | N if newsgroup is new, u if unsubscribed, blank otherwise |
%n | Number of new articles in newsgroup |
%s | Number of unread articles in newsgroup |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X" |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with character "X" |
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, the header fields normally added by the “my_hdr” command are not created. This variable must be unset before composing a new message or replying in order to take effect. If set, the user defined header fields are added to every new message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, this variable causes NeoMutt to include the header of the message you are replying to into the edit buffer. The $weed setting applies.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
This variable points to the header cache database. If pointing to a directory NeoMutt will contain a header cache database file per folder, if pointing to a file that file will be a single global header cache. By default it is unset so no header caching will be used.
Header caching can greatly improve speed when opening POP, IMAP MH or Maildir folders, see “caching” for details.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When NeoMutt is compiled with qdbm, tokyocabinet or kyotocabinet as header cache backend, this option determines whether the database will be compressed. Compression results in database files roughly being one fifth of the usual diskspace, but the decompression can result in a slower opening of cached folder(s) which in general is still much faster than opening non header cached folders.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, color header regexes behave like color body regexes: color is applied to the exact text matched by the regex. When unset, color is applied to the entire header.
One use of this option might be to apply color to just the header labels.
See “color” for more details.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, help lines describing the bindings for the major functions provided by each menu are displayed on the first line of the screen.
Note: The binding will not be displayed correctly if the function is bound to a sequence rather than a single keystroke. Also, the help line may not be updated if a binding is changed while NeoMutt is running. Since this variable is primarily aimed at new users, neither of these should present a major problem.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will skip the host name part of $hostname variable when adding the domain part to addresses. This variable does not affect the generation of Message-IDs, and it will not lead to the cut-off of first-level domains.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of messages that are hidden by limiting, in the thread tree.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of missing messages in the thread tree.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will not show the subject of messages in the thread tree that have the same subject as their parent or closest previously displayed sibling.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of messages that are hidden by limiting, at the top of threads in the thread tree. Note that when $hide_limited is set, this option will have no effect.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of missing messages at the top of threads in the thread tree. Note that when $hide_missing is set, this option will have no effect.
Type: number
Default: 10
This variable controls the size (in number of strings remembered) of the string history buffer per category. The buffer is cleared each time the variable is set.
Type: path
Default: “~/.mutthistory
”
The file in which NeoMutt will save its history.
Also see $save_history.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, all of the string history will be scanned for duplicates when a new entry is added. Duplicate entries in the $history_file will also be removed when it is periodically compacted.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will not display attachments with a disposition of “attachment” inline even if it could render the part to plain text. These MIME parts can only be viewed from the attachment menu.
If unset, NeoMutt will render all MIME parts it can properly transform to plain text.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not a Mail-Followup-To header is honored when group-replying to a message.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Specifies the fully-qualified hostname of the system NeoMutt is running on containing the host's name and the DNS domain it belongs to. It is used as the domain part (after “@”) for local email addresses as well as Message-Id headers.
Its value is determined at startup as follows: the node's
hostname is first determined by the uname(3)
function. The
domain is then looked up using the gethostname(2)
and
getaddrinfo(3)
functions. If those calls are unable to
determine the domain, the full value returned by uname is used.
Optionally, NeoMutt can be compiled with a fixed domain name in
which case a detected one is not used.
Also see $use_domain and $hidden_host.
Note: On Debian systems, the default for this variable is obtained from /etc/mailname when Mutt starts.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will show you international domain names decoded. Note: You can use IDNs for addresses even if this is unset. This variable only affects decoding. (IDN only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will encode international domain names using IDN. Unset this if your SMTP server can handle newer (RFC6531) UTF-8 encoded domains. (IDN only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
This option replaces linear-white-space between encoded-word and text to a single space to prevent the display of MIME-encoded “Subject:” field from being divided into multiple lines.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Affects the behavior of the <reply>
function when replying to
messages from mailing lists (as defined by the “subscribe” or
“lists” commands). When set, if the “Reply-To:” field is
set to the same value as the “To:” field, NeoMutt assumes that the
“Reply-To:” field was set by the mailing list to automate responses
to the list, and will ignore this field. To direct a response to the
mailing list when this option is set, use the <list-reply>
function; <group-reply>
will reply to both the sender and the
list.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
When set to info
, the multipart/alternative information is shown.
When set to inline
, all of the alternatives are displayed.
When not set, the default behavior is to show only the chosen alternative.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is a colon-delimited list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to an IMAP server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are either “login” or the right side of an IMAP “AUTH=xxx” capability string, e.g. “digest-md5”, “gssapi” or “cram-md5”. This option is case-insensitive. If it's unset (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure.
Example:
set imap_authenticators="gssapi:cram-md5:login"
Note: NeoMutt will only fall back to other authentication methods if the previous methods are unavailable. If a method is available but authentication fails, NeoMutt will not connect to the IMAP server.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will fetch the set of subscribed folders from your server on connection, and add them to the set of mailboxes it polls for new mail just as if you had issued individual “mailboxes” commands.
Type: string
Default: “/.
”
This contains the list of characters which you would like to treat as folder separators for displaying IMAP paths. In particular it helps in using the “=” shortcut for your folder variable.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
NeoMutt requests these header fields in addition to the default headers (“Date:”, “From:”, “Subject:”, “To:”, “Cc:”, “Message-Id:”, “References:”, “Content-Type:”, “Content-Description:”, “In-Reply-To:”, “Reply-To:”, “Lines:”, “List-Post:”, “X-Label:”) from IMAP servers before displaying the index menu. You may want to add more headers for spam detection.
Note: This is a space separated list, items should be uppercase and not contain the colon, e.g. “X-BOGOSITY X-SPAM-STATUS” for the “X-Bogosity:” and “X-Spam-Status:” header fields.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will attempt to use the IMAP IDLE extension to check for new mail in the current mailbox. Some servers (dovecot was the inspiration for this option) react badly to NeoMutt's implementation. If your connection seems to freeze up periodically, try unsetting this.
Type: number
Default: 300
This variable specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that NeoMutt will wait before polling open IMAP connections, to prevent the server from closing them before NeoMutt has finished with them. The default is well within the RFC-specified minimum amount of time (30 minutes) before a server is allowed to do this, but in practice the RFC does get violated every now and then. Reduce this number if you find yourself getting disconnected from your IMAP server due to inactivity.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable configures whether IMAP folder browsing will look for
only subscribed folders or all folders. This can be toggled in the
IMAP browser with the <toggle-subscribed>
function.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Your login name on the IMAP server.
This variable defaults to the value of $imap_user.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Specifies the password for your IMAP account. If unset, NeoMutt will
prompt you for your password when you invoke the <imap-fetch-mail>
function
or try to open an IMAP folder.
Warning: you should only use this option when you are on a fairly secure machine, because the superuser can read your neomuttrc even if you are the only one who can read the file.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will not open new IMAP connections to check for new mail. NeoMutt will only check for new mail over existing IMAP connections. This is useful if you don't want to be prompted to user/password pairs on NeoMutt invocation, or if opening the connection is slow.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will avoid implicitly marking your mail as read whenever you fetch a message from the server. This is generally a good thing, but can make closing an IMAP folder somewhat slower. This option exists to appease speed freaks.
Type: number
Default: 15
Controls the number of IMAP commands that may be queued up before they are sent to the server. A deeper pipeline reduces the amount of time NeoMutt must wait for the server, and can make IMAP servers feel much more responsive. But not all servers correctly handle pipelined commands, so if you have problems you might want to try setting this variable to 0.
Note: Changes to this variable have no effect on open connections.
Type: number
Default: 15
This variable specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that NeoMutt will wait for a response when polling IMAP connections for new mail, before timing out and closing the connection. Set to 0 to disable timing out.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will display warning messages from the IMAP server as error messages. Since these messages are often harmless, or generated due to configuration problems on the server which are out of the users' hands, you may wish to suppress them at some point.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
The name of the user whose mail you intend to access on the IMAP server.
This variable defaults to your user name on the local machine.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set to “yes”, NeoMutt will look for a mailcap entry with the
“copiousoutput
” flag set for every MIME attachment it doesn't have
an internal viewer defined for. If such an entry is found, NeoMutt will
use the viewer defined in that entry to convert the body part to text
form.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether or not a copy of the message(s) you are replying to is included in your reply.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether or not NeoMutt includes only the first attachment of the message you are replying.
Type: string
Default: “>
”
Specifies the string to prepend to each line of text quoted in a message to which you are replying. You are strongly encouraged not to change this value, as it tends to agitate the more fanatical netizens.
The value of this option is ignored if $text_flowed is set, because the quoting mechanism is strictly defined for format=flowed.
This option is a format string, please see the description of
$index_format for supported printf(3)
-style sequences.
Type: string
Default: “%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%?l?%4l&%4c?) %s
”
This variable allows you to customize the message index display to your personal taste.
“Format strings” are similar to the strings used in the C
function printf(3)
to format output (see the man page for more details).
For an explanation of the %? construct, see the status_format description.
The following sequences are defined in NeoMutt:
%a | Address of the author |
%A | Reply-to address (if present; otherwise: address of author) |
%b | Filename of the original message folder (think mailbox) |
%B | The list to which the letter was sent, or else the folder name (%b). |
%c | Number of characters (bytes) in the message |
%C | Current message number |
%d | Date and time of the message in the format specified by $date_format converted to sender's time zone |
%D | Date and time of the message in the format specified by $date_format converted to the local time zone |
%e | Current message number in thread |
%E | Number of messages in current thread |
%f | Sender (address + real name), either From: or Return-Path: |
%F | Author name, or recipient name if the message is from you |
%g | Newsgroup name (if compiled with NNTP support) |
%g | Message labels (e.g. notmuch tags) |
%H | Spam attribute(s) of this message |
%I | Initials of author |
%i | Message-id of the current message |
%K | The list to which the letter was sent (if any; otherwise: empty) |
%l | Number of lines in the message (does not work with maildir, Mh, and possibly IMAP folders) |
%L | If an address in the “To:” or “Cc:” header field matches an address Defined by the users “subscribe” command, this displays "To <list-name>", otherwise the same as %F |
%m | Total number of message in the mailbox |
%M | Number of hidden messages if the thread is collapsed |
%N | Message score |
%n | Author's real name (or address if missing) |
%O | Original save folder where NeoMutt would formerly have Stashed the message: list name or recipient name If not sent to a list |
%P | Progress indicator for the built-in pager (how much of the file has been displayed) |
%q | Newsgroup name (if compiled with NNTP support) |
%r | Comma separated list of “To:” recipients |
%R | Comma separated list of “Cc:” recipients |
%s | Subject of the message |
%S | Single character status of the message (“N”/“O”/“D”/“d”/“!”/“r”/“*”) |
%t | “To:” field (recipients) |
%T | The appropriate character from the $to_chars string |
%u | User (login) name of the author |
%v | First name of the author, or the recipient if the message is from you |
%W | Name of organization of author (“Organization:” field) |
%x | “X-Comment-To:” field (if present and compiled with NNTP support) |
%X | Number of attachments (please see the “attachments” section for possible speed effects) |
%y | “X-Label:” field, if present |
%Y | “X-Label:” field, if present, and (1) not at part of a thread tree, (2) at the top of a thread, or (3) “X-Label:” is different from Preceding message's “X-Label:” |
%Z | A three character set of message status flags. The first character is new/read/replied flags (“n”/“o”/“r”/“O”/“N”). The second is deleted or encryption flags (“D”/“d”/“S”/“P”/“s”/“K”). The third is either tagged/flagged (“*”/“!”), or one of the characters Listed in $to_chars. |
%zs | Message status flags |
%zc | Message crypto flags |
%zt | Message tag flags |
%{fmt} | the date and time of the message is converted to sender's
time zone, and “fmt” is expanded by the library function
strftime(3) ; a leading bang disables locales
|
%[fmt] | the date and time of the message is converted to the local
time zone, and “fmt” is expanded by the library function
strftime(3) ; a leading bang disables locales
|
%(fmt) | the local date and time when the message was received.
“fmt” is expanded by the library function strftime(3) ;
a leading bang disables locales
|
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with character “X” |
%|X | pad to the end of the line with character “X” |
%*X | soft-fill with character “X” as pad |
Date format expressions can be constructed based on relative dates. Using the date formatting operators along with nested conditionals, the date format can be modified based on how old a message is. See the section on “Conditional Dates” for an explanation and examples “Soft-fill” deserves some explanation: Normal right-justification will print everything to the left of the “%>”, displaying padding and whatever lies to the right only if there's room. By contrast, soft-fill gives priority to the right-hand side, guaranteeing space to display it and showing padding only if there's still room. If necessary, soft-fill will eat text leftwards to make room for rightward text.
Note that these expandos are supported in “save-hook”, “fcc-hook” and “fcc-save-hook”, too.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
If set, specifies the program and arguments used to deliver news posted by NeoMutt. Otherwise, NeoMutt posts article using current connection to news server. The following printf-style sequence is understood:
%a | account url |
%p | port |
%P | port if specified |
%s | news server name |
%S | url schema |
%u | username |
Example:
set inews="/usr/local/bin/inews -hS"
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, read messages marked as flagged will not be moved from your spool mailbox to your $mbox mailbox, or as a result of a “mbox-hook” command.
Type: number
Default: 5
This variable configures how often (in seconds) NeoMutt should look for new mail. Also see the $timeout variable.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will only notify you about new mail that has been received since the last time you opened the mailbox. When unset, NeoMutt will notify you if any new mail exists in the mailbox, regardless of whether you have visited it recently.
When $mark_old is set, NeoMutt does not consider the mailbox to contain new mail if only old messages exist.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will periodically calculate message statistics of a mailbox while polling for new mail. It will check for unread, flagged, and total message counts. Because this operation is more performance intensive, it defaults to unset, and has a separate option, $mail_check_stats_interval, to control how often to update these counts.
Type: number
Default: 60
When $mail_check_stats is set, this variable configures how often (in seconds) NeoMutt will update message counts.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies which files to consult when attempting to display MIME bodies not directly supported by NeoMutt.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will restrict possible characters in mailcap % expandos to a well-defined set of safe characters. This is the safe setting, but we are not sure it doesn't break some more advanced MIME stuff.
DON'T CHANGE THIS SETTING UNLESS YOU ARE REALLY SURE WHAT YOU ARE DOING!
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Check for Maildir unaware programs other than NeoMutt having modified maildir
files when the header cache is in use. This incurs one stat(2)
per
message every time the folder is opened (which can be very slow for NFS
folders).
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, messages marked as deleted will be saved with the maildir trashed flag instead of unlinked. Note: this only applies to maildir-style mailboxes. Setting it will have no effect on other mailbox types.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will poll both the new and cur directories of a maildir folder for new messages. This might be useful if other programs interacting with the folder (e.g. dovecot) are moving new messages to the cur directory. Note that setting this option may slow down polling for new messages in large folders, since NeoMutt has to scan all cur messages.
Type: string
Default: “'
”
Prefix for macros created using mark-message. A new macro automatically generated with <mark-message>a will be composed from this prefix and the letter a.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether or not NeoMutt marks new unread messages as old if you exit a mailbox without reading them. With this option set, the next time you start NeoMutt, the messages will show up with an “O” next to them in the index menu, indicating that they are old.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls the display of wrapped lines in the internal pager. If set, a “+” marker is displayed at the beginning of wrapped lines.
Also see the $smart_wrap variable.
Type: regular expression
Default: “!^\.[^.]
”
A regular expression used in the file browser, optionally preceded by the not operator “!”. Only files whose names match this mask will be shown. The match is always case-sensitive.
Type: path
Default: “~/mbox
”
This specifies the folder into which read mail in your $spoolfile folder will be appended.
Also see the $move variable.
Type: folder magic
Default: mbox
The default mailbox type used when creating new folders. May be any of
“mbox”, “MMDF”, “MH” and “Maildir”. This is overridden by the
-m
command-line option.
Type: number
Default: 0
This variable controls the number of lines of context that are given when scrolling through menus. (Similar to $pager_context.)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, the bottom entry of menus will never scroll up past the bottom of the screen, unless there are less entries than lines. When set, the bottom entry may move off the bottom.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, menus will be scrolled up or down one line when you attempt to move across a screen boundary. If unset, the screen is cleared and the next or previous page of the menu is displayed (useful for slow links to avoid many redraws).
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will clean out obsolete entries from the message cache when the mailbox is synchronized. You probably only want to set it every once in a while, since it can be a little slow (especially for large folders).
Type: path
Default: (empty)
Set this to a directory and NeoMutt will cache copies of messages from your IMAP and POP servers here. You are free to remove entries at any time.
When setting this variable to a directory, NeoMutt needs to fetch every remote message only once and can perform regular expression searches as fast as for local folders.
Also see the $message_cache_clean variable.
Type: string
Default: “%s
”
This is the string displayed in the “attachment” menu for
attachments of type message/rfc822
. For a full listing of defined
printf(3)
-like sequences see the section on $index_format.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, forces NeoMutt to interpret keystrokes with the high bit (bit 8)
set as if the user had pressed the Esc key and whatever key remains
after having the high bit removed. For example, if the key pressed
has an ASCII value of 0xf8
, then this is treated as if the user had
pressed Esc then “x”. This is because the result of removing the
high bit from 0xf8
is 0x78
, which is the ASCII character
“x”.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If unset, NeoMutt will remove your address (see the “alternates” command) from the list of recipients when replying to a message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When unset, NeoMutt will mimic mh's behavior and rename deleted messages to ,<old file name> in mh folders instead of really deleting them. This leaves the message on disk but makes programs reading the folder ignore it. If the variable is set, the message files will simply be deleted.
This option is similar to $maildir_trash for Maildir folders.
Type: string
Default: “flagged
”
The name of the MH sequence used for flagged messages.
Type: string
Default: “replied
”
The name of the MH sequence used to tag replied messages.
Type: string
Default: “unseen
”
The name of the MH sequence used for unseen messages.
Type: quadoption
Default: no
When set, the message you are forwarding will be attached as a
separate message/rfc822
MIME part instead of included in the main body of the
message. This is useful for forwarding MIME messages so the receiver
can properly view the message as it was delivered to you. If you like
to switch between MIME and not MIME from mail to mail, set this
variable to “ask-no” or “ask-yes”.
Also see $forward_decode and $mime_forward_decode.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls the decoding of complex MIME messages into text/plain
when
forwarding a message while $mime_forward is set. Otherwise
$forward_decode is used instead.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
When forwarding multiple attachments of a MIME message from the attachment menu, attachments which cannot be decoded in a reasonable manner will be attached to the newly composed message if this option is set.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If unset, 8-bit “subject:” line in article header will not be encoded according to RFC2047 to base64. This is useful when message is Usenet article, because MIME for news is nonstandard feature.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This specifies a command to run, to determine the mime type of a new attachment when composing a message. Unless $mime_type_query_first is set, this will only be run if the attachment's extension is not found in the mime.types file.
The string may contain a “%s”, which will be substituted with the attachment filename. NeoMutt will add quotes around the string substituted for “%s” automatically according to shell quoting rules, so you should avoid adding your own. If no “%s” is found in the string, NeoMutt will append the attachment filename to the end of the string.
The command should output a single line containing the attachment's mime type.
Suggested values are “xdg-mime query filetype” or “file -bi”.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the $mime_type_query_command will be run before the mime.types lookup.
Type: string
Default: “%4n %c %-16s %a
”
This variable describes the format of a remailer line on the mixmaster
chain selection screen. The following printf(3)
-like sequences are
supported:
%a | The remailer's e-mail address |
%c | Remailer capabilities |
%n | The running number on the menu |
%s | The remailer's short name |
Type: path
Default: “mixmaster
”
This variable contains the path to the Mixmaster binary on your system. It is used with various sets of parameters to gather the list of known remailers, and to finally send a message through the mixmaster chain.
Note: On Debian systems, this option is set by default to “mixmaster-filter” in /etc/Muttrc.
Type: quadoption
Default: no
Controls whether or not NeoMutt will move read messages from your spool mailbox to your $mbox mailbox, or as a result of a “mbox-hook” command.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable, when set, makes the thread tree narrower, allowing deeper threads to fit on the screen.
Type: number
Default: 10
Operations that expect to transfer a large amount of data over the network will update their progress every $net_inc kilobytes. If set to 0, no progress messages will be displayed.
See also $read_inc, $write_inc and $net_inc.
Type: path
Default: “NULL
”
If set, NeoMutt will call this command after a new message is received. See the $status_format documentation for the values that can be formatted into this command.
Type: path
Default: “~/.neomutt
”
This variable pointing to directory where NeoMutt will save cached news articles and headers in. If unset, articles and headers will not be saved at all and will be reloaded from the server each time.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies domain name or address of NNTP server. It defaults to the news server specified in the environment variable $NNTPSERVER or contained in the file /etc/nntpserver. You can also specify username and an alternative port for each news server, ie:
[[s]news://][username[:password]@]server[:port]
Type: path
Default: “~/.newsrc
”
The file, containing info about subscribed newsgroups - names and indexes of read articles. The following printf-style sequence is understood:
%a | Account url |
%p | Port |
%P | Port if specified |
%s | News server name |
%S | Url schema |
%u | Username |
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is a colon-delimited list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to a news server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are either “user” or any SASL mechanism, e.g. “digest-md5”, “gssapi” or “cram-md5”. This option is case-insensitive. If it's unset (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure.
Example:
set nntp_authenticators="digest-md5:user"
Note: NeoMutt will only fall back to other authentication methods if the previous methods are unavailable. If a method is available but authentication fails, NeoMutt will not connect to the IMAP server.
Type: number
Default: 1000
This variable defines number of articles which will be in index when newsgroup entered. If active newsgroup have more articles than this number, oldest articles will be ignored. Also controls how many articles headers will be saved in cache when you quit newsgroup.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not existence of each article is checked when newsgroup is entered.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable controls whether or not descriptions for each newsgroup must be loaded when newsgroup is added to list (first time list loading or new newsgroup adding).
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Your login name on the NNTP server. If unset and NNTP server requires authentication, NeoMutt will prompt you for your account name when you connect to news server.
Type: number
Default: 60
The time in seconds until any operations on newsgroup except post new article will cause recheck for new news. If set to 0, NeoMutt will recheck newsgroup on each operation in index (stepping, read article, etc.).
Type: number
Default: 5
This variable specifies the timeout for database open in seconds.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies the default Notmuch database in format notmuch://<absolute path>.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
The messages tagged with these tags are excluded and not loaded from notmuch DB to NeoMutt unless specified explicitly.
Type: string
Default: “unread
”
This variable specifies notmuch tag which is used for unread messages. The variable is used to count unread messages in DB only. All other NeoMutt commands use standard (e.g. maildir) flags.
Type: number
Default: 0
This variable specifies the default limit used in notmuch queries.
Type: string
Default: “messages
”
This variable specifies the default query type (threads or messages) used in notmuch queries.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable specifies if the NeoMutt record should indexed by notmuch.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies the default tags applied to messages stored to the NeoMutt record. When set to 0 this variable disable the window feature.
Type: number
Default: 0
This variable sets the time base of a windowed notmuch query. Accepted values are 'minute', 'hour', 'day', 'week', 'month', 'year'
Type: string
Default: “week
”
This variable sets the time duration of a windowed notmuch query. Accepted values all non negative integers. A value of 0 disables the feature.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable sets the time duration of a windowed notmuch query. Accepted values all non negative integers. A value of 0 disables the feature.
Type: number
Default: 0
This variable contains the currently setup notmuch search for window based vfolder.
Type: path
Default: “builtin
”
This variable specifies which pager you would like to use to view messages. The value “builtin” means to use the built-in pager, otherwise this variable should specify the pathname of the external pager you would like to use.
Using an external pager may have some disadvantages: Additional keystrokes are necessary because you can't call NeoMutt functions directly from the pager, and screen resizes cause lines longer than the screen width to be badly formatted in the help menu.
Type: string
Default: “unread,draft,flagged,passed,replied,attachment,signed,encrypted
”
This variable specifies private notmuch/imap tags which should not be printed on screen.
Type: number
Default: 0
This variable controls the number of lines of context that are given when displaying the next or previous page in the internal pager. By default, NeoMutt will display the line after the last one on the screen at the top of the next page (0 lines of context).
This variable also specifies the amount of context given for search results. If positive, this many lines will be given before a match, if 0, the match will be top-aligned.
Type: string
Default: “-%Z- %C/%m: %-20.20n %s%* -- (%P)
”
This variable controls the format of the one-line message “status” displayed before each message in either the internal or an external pager. The valid sequences are listed in the $index_format section.
Type: number
Default: 0
Determines the number of lines of a mini-index which is shown when in the pager. The current message, unless near the top or bottom of the folder, will be roughly one third of the way down this mini-index, giving the reader the context of a few messages before and after the message. This is useful, for example, to determine how many messages remain to be read in the current thread. One of the lines is reserved for the status bar from the index, so a setting of 6 will only show 5 lines of the actual index. A value of 0 results in no index being shown. If the number of messages in the current folder is less than $pager_index_lines, then the index will only use as many lines as it needs.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the internal-pager will not move to the next message
when you are at the end of a message and invoke the <next-page>
function.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will automatically attempt to decrypt traditional PGP
messages whenever the user performs an operation which ordinarily would
result in the contents of the message being operated on. For example,
if the user displays a pgp-traditional message which has not been manually
checked with the <check-traditional-pgp>
function, NeoMutt will automatically
check the message for traditional pgp.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This option controls whether NeoMutt generates old-style inline (traditional) PGP encrypted or signed messages under certain circumstances. This can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when inline is not required. The GPGME backend does not support this option.
Note that NeoMutt might automatically use PGP/MIME for messages which consist of more than a single MIME part. NeoMutt can be configured to ask before sending PGP/MIME messages when inline (traditional) would not work.
Also see the $pgp_mime_auto variable.
Also note that using the old-style PGP message format is strongly deprecated. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will check the exit code of the PGP subprocess when signing or encrypting. A non-zero exit code means that the subprocess failed. (PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This format is used to create an old-style “clearsigned” PGP message. Note that the use of this format is strongly deprecated.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This format strings specifies a command which is used to decode application/pgp attachments.
The PGP command formats have their own set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%p | Expands to PGPPASSFD=0 when a pass phrase is needed, to an empty string otherwise. Note: This may be used with a %? construct. |
%f | Expands to the name of a file containing a message. |
%s | Expands to the name of a file containing the signature part
of a multipart/signed attachment when verifying it.
|
%a | The value of $pgp_sign_as. |
%r | One or more key IDs (or fingerprints if available). |
For examples on how to configure these formats for the various versions
of PGP which are floating around, see the pgp and gpg sample configuration files in
the samples/
subdirectory which has been installed on your system
alongside the documentation.
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to decrypt a PGP encrypted message.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: regular expression
Default: (empty)
If you assign text to this variable, then an encrypted PGP message is only considered successfully decrypted if the output from $pgp_decrypt_command contains the text. This is used to protect against a spoofed encrypted message, with multipart/encrypted headers but containing a block that is not actually encrypted. (e.g. simply signed and ascii armored text). (PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to encrypt a body part without signing it.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to both sign and encrypt a body part.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: “%4n %t%f %4l/0x%k %-4a %2c %u
”
This variable allows you to customize the PGP key selection menu to
your personal taste. This string is similar to $index_format, but
has its own set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%a | Algorithm |
%c | Capabilities |
%f | Flags |
%k | Key id |
%l | Key length |
%n | Number |
%p | Protocol |
%t | Trust/validity of the key-uid association |
%u | User id |
%[<s>] | Date of the key where <s> is an strftime(3) expression
|
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to export a public key from the user's key ring.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is invoked whenever NeoMutt needs to fetch the public key associated with
an email address. Of the sequences supported by $pgp_decode_command, %r is
the only printf(3)
-like sequence used with this format. Note that
in this case, %r expands to the email address, not the public key ID (the key ID is
unknown, which is why NeoMutt is invoking this command).
(PGP only)
Type: regular expression
Default: (empty)
If you assign a text to this variable, then a PGP signature is only considered verified if the output from $pgp_verify_command contains the text. Use this variable if the exit code from the command is 0 even for bad signatures. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to ignore OpenPGP subkeys. Instead, the principal key will inherit the subkeys' capabilities. Unset this if you want to play interesting key selection games. (PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to import a key from a message into the user's public key ring.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to list the public key ring's contents. The output format must be analogous to the one used by
gpg --list-keys --with-colons --with-fingerprint
This format is also generated by the pgpring
utility which comes
with NeoMutt.
Note: gpg's fixed-list-mode
option should not be used. It
produces a different date format which may result in NeoMutt showing
incorrect key generation dates.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to list the secret key ring's contents. The output format must be analogous to the one used by:
gpg --list-keys --with-colons --with-fingerprint
This format is also generated by the pgpring
utility which comes
with NeoMutt.
Note: gpg's fixed-list-mode
option should not be used. It
produces a different date format which may result in NeoMutt showing
incorrect key generation dates.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, use 64 bit PGP key IDs, if unset use the normal 32 bit key IDs. NOTE: Internally, NeoMutt has transitioned to using fingerprints (or long key IDs as a fallback). This option now only controls the display of key IDs in the key selection menu and a few other places. (PGP only)
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
This option controls whether NeoMutt will prompt you for automatically sending a (signed/encrypted) message using PGP/MIME when inline (traditional) fails (for any reason).
Also note that using the old-style PGP message format is strongly deprecated. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to always attempt to create an inline (traditional) message when replying to a message which is PGP encrypted/signed inline. This can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when inline is not required. This option does not automatically detect if the (replied-to) message is inline; instead it relies on NeoMutt internals for previously checked/flagged messages.
Note that NeoMutt might automatically use PGP/MIME for messages which consist of more than a single MIME part. NeoMutt can be configured to ask before sending PGP/MIME messages when inline (traditional) would not work.
Also see the $pgp_mime_auto variable.
Also note that using the old-style PGP message format is strongly deprecated. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, signed and encrypted messages will consist of nested
multipart/signed
and multipart/encrypted
body parts.
This is useful for applications like encrypted and signed mailing
lists, where the outer layer (multipart/encrypted
) can be easily
removed, while the inner multipart/signed
part is retained.
(PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, PGP encrypted messages will also be encrypted using the key in $pgp_self_encrypt_as. (PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is an additional key used to encrypt messages when $pgp_self_encrypt is set. It is also used to specify the key for $postpone_encrypt. It should be in keyid or fingerprint form (e.g. 0x00112233). (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will display non-usable keys on the PGP key selection menu. This includes keys which have been revoked, have expired, or have been marked as “disabled” by the user. (PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
If you have more than one key pair, this option allows you to specify
which of your private keys to use. It is recommended that you use the
keyid form to specify your key (e.g. 0x00112233
).
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to create the detached PGP signature for a
multipart/signed
PGP/MIME body part.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: sort order
Default: address
Specifies how the entries in the pgp menu are sorted. The following are legal values:
address | sort alphabetically by user id |
keyid | sort alphabetically by key id |
date | sort by key creation date |
trust | sort by the trust of the key |
If you prefer reverse order of the above values, prefix it with “reverse-”. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will automatically encode PGP/MIME signed messages as quoted-printable. Please note that unsetting this variable may lead to problems with non-verifyable PGP signatures, so only change this if you know what you are doing. (PGP only)
Type: number
Default: 300
The number of seconds after which a cached passphrase will expire if not used. (PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will use a possibly-running gpg-agent(1)
process.
Note that as of version 2.1, GnuPG no longer exports GPG_AGENT_INFO, so
NeoMutt no longer verifies if the agent is running.
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to verify PGP signatures.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to verify key information from the key selection menu.
This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(PGP only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
Used in connection with the <pipe-message>
command. When unset,
NeoMutt will pipe the messages without any preprocessing. When set, NeoMutt
will weed headers and will attempt to decode the messages
first.
Type: string
Default: “\n
”
The separator to add between messages when piping a list of tagged messages to an external Unix command.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Used in connection with the <pipe-message>
function following
<tag-prefix>
. If this variable is unset, when piping a list of
tagged messages NeoMutt will concatenate the messages and will pipe them
all concatenated. When set, NeoMutt will pipe the messages one by one.
In both cases the messages are piped in the current sorted order,
and the $pipe_sep separator is added after each message.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, NeoMutt will try all available authentication methods. When unset, NeoMutt will only fall back to other authentication methods if the previous methods are unavailable. If a method is available but authentication fails, NeoMutt will not connect to the POP server.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is a colon-delimited list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to an POP server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are either “user”, “apop” or any SASL mechanism, e.g. “digest-md5”, “gssapi” or “cram-md5”. This option is case-insensitive. If this option is unset (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure.
Example:
set pop_authenticators="digest-md5:apop:user"
Type: number
Default: 60
This variable configures how often (in seconds) NeoMutt should look for new mail in the currently selected mailbox if it is a POP mailbox.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-no
If set, NeoMutt will delete successfully downloaded messages from the POP
server when using the <fetch-mail>
function. When unset, NeoMutt will
download messages but also leave them on the POP server.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
The name of your POP server for the <fetch-mail>
function. You
can also specify an alternative port, username and password, i.e.:
[pop[s]://][username[:password]@]popserver[:port]
where “[...]” denotes an optional part.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If this variable is set, NeoMutt will try to use the “LAST
” POP command
for retrieving only unread messages from the POP server when using
the <fetch-mail>
function.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Specifies the password for your POP account. If unset, NeoMutt will prompt you for your password when you open a POP mailbox.
Warning: you should only use this option when you are on a fairly secure machine, because the superuser can read your neomuttrc even if you are the only one who can read the file.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether or not NeoMutt will try to reconnect to the POP server if the connection is lost.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Your login name on the POP server.
This variable defaults to your user name on the local machine.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Similar to the $attribution variable, NeoMutt will append this string after the inclusion of a message which is being replied to.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
If set to yes, NeoMutt will post article to newsgroup that have not permissions to posting (e.g. moderated). Note: if news server does not support posting to that newsgroup or totally read-only, that posting will not have an effect.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether or not messages are saved in the $postponed mailbox when you elect not to send immediately.
Also see the $recall variable.
Type: path
Default: “~/postponed
”
NeoMutt allows you to indefinitely “postpone sending a message” which you are editing. When you choose to postpone a message, NeoMutt saves it in the mailbox specified by this variable.
Also see the $postpone variable.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, postponed messages that are marked for encryption will be self-encrypted. NeoMutt will first try to encrypt using the value specified in $pgp_self_encrypt_as or $smime_self_encrypt_as. If those are not set, it will try the deprecated $postpone_encrypt_as. (Crypto only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is a deprecated fall-back variable for $postpone_encrypt. Please use $pgp_self_encrypt_as or $smime_self_encrypt_as. (Crypto only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
If set, a shell command to be executed if NeoMutt fails to establish
a connection to the server. This is useful for setting up secure
connections, e.g. with ssh(1)
. If the command returns a nonzero
status, NeoMutt gives up opening the server. Example:
set preconnect="ssh -f -q -L 1234:mailhost.net:143 mailhost.net \ sleep 20 < /dev/null > /dev/null"
Mailbox “foo” on “mailhost.net” can now be reached as “{localhost:1234}foo”.
Note: For this example to work, you must be able to log in to the remote machine without having to enter a password.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-no
Controls whether or not NeoMutt really prints messages. This is set to “ask-no” by default, because some people accidentally hit “p” often.
Type: path
Default: “lpr
”
This specifies the command pipe that should be used to print messages.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Used in connection with the <print-message>
command. If this
option is set, the message is decoded before it is passed to the
external command specified by $print_command. If this option
is unset, no processing will be applied to the message when
printing it. The latter setting may be useful if you are using
some advanced printer filter which is able to properly format
e-mail messages for printing.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Used in connection with the <print-message>
command. If this option
is set, the command specified by $print_command is executed once for
each message which is to be printed. If this option is unset,
the command specified by $print_command is executed only once, and
all the messages are concatenated, with a form feed as the message
separator.
Those who use the enscript
(1) program's mail-printing mode will
most likely want to set this option.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If you use an external $pager, setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to prompt you for a command when the pager exits rather than returning to the index menu. If unset, NeoMutt will return to the index menu when the external pager exits.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
This specifies the command NeoMutt will use to make external address queries. The string may contain a “%s”, which will be substituted with the query string the user types. NeoMutt will add quotes around the string substituted for “%s” automatically according to shell quoting rules, so you should avoid adding your own. If no “%s” is found in the string, NeoMutt will append the user's query to the end of the string. See “query” for more information.
Type: string
Default: “%4c %t %-25.25a %-25.25n %?e?(%e)?
”
This variable describes the format of the “query” menu. The
following printf(3)
-style sequences are understood:
%a | Destination address |
%c | Current entry number |
%e | Extra information * |
%n | Destination name |
%t | “*” if current entry is tagged, a space otherwise |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with “X” |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with “X” |
%*X | Soft-fill with character “X” as pad |
For an explanation of “soft-fill”, see the $index_format documentation.
* = can be optionally printed if nonzero, see the $status_format documentation.
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
This variable controls whether “quit” and “exit” actually quit from NeoMutt. If this option is set, they do quit, if it is unset, they have no effect, and if it is set to ask-yes or ask-no, you are prompted for confirmation when you try to quit.
Type: regular expression
Default: “^([ \t]*[|>:}#])+
”
A regular expression used in the internal pager to determine quoted
sections of text in the body of a message. Quoted text may be filtered
out using the <toggle-quoted>
command, or colored according to the
“color quoted” family of directives.
Higher levels of quoting may be colored differently (“color quoted1”, “color quoted2”, etc.). The quoting level is determined by removing the last character from the matched text and recursively reapplying the regular expression until it fails to produce a match.
Match detection may be overridden by the $smileys regular expression.
Type: number
Default: 10
If set to a value greater than 0, NeoMutt will display which message it is currently on when reading a mailbox or when performing search actions such as search and limit. The message is printed after this many messages have been read or searched (e.g., if set to 25, NeoMutt will print a message when it is at message 25, and then again when it gets to message 50). This variable is meant to indicate progress when reading or searching large mailboxes which may take some time. When set to 0, only a single message will appear before the reading the mailbox.
Also see the $write_inc, $net_inc and $time_inc variables and the “tuning” section of the manual for performance considerations.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies what “real” or “personal” name should be used when sending messages.
By default, this is the GECOS field from /etc/passwd
. Note that this
variable will not be used when the user has set a real name
in the $from variable.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
Controls whether or not NeoMutt recalls postponed messages when composing a new message.
Setting this variable to yes is not generally useful, and thus not
recommended. Note that the <recall-message>
function can be used
to manually recall postponed messages.
Also see $postponed variable.
Type: path
Default: “~/sent
”
This specifies the file into which your outgoing messages should be appended. (This is meant as the primary method for saving a copy of your messages, but another way to do this is using the “my_hdr” command to create a “Bcc:” field with your email address in it.)
The value of $record is overridden by the $force_name and $save_name variables, and the “fcc-hook” command.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This option controls how quotes from format=flowed messages are displayed in the pager and when replying (with $text_flowed unset). When set, this option adds spaces after each level of quote marks, turning ">>>foo" into "> > > foo".
Note: If $reflow_text is unset, this option has no effect. Also, this option does not affect replies when $text_flowed is set.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will reformat paragraphs in text/plain parts marked format=flowed. If unset, NeoMutt will display paragraphs unaltered from how they appear in the message body. See RFC3676 for details on the format=flowed format.
Also see $reflow_wrap, and $wrap.
Type: number
Default: 78
This variable controls the maximum paragraph width when reformatting text/plain parts when $reflow_text is set. When the value is 0, paragraphs will be wrapped at the terminal's right margin. A positive value sets the paragraph width relative to the left margin. A negative value set the paragraph width relative to the right margin.
Also see $wrap.
Type: regular expression
Default: “^(re([\[0-9\]+])*|aw):[ \t]*
”
A regular expression used to recognize reply messages when threading and replying. The default value corresponds to the English "Re:" and the German "Aw:".
Type: boolean
Default: no
If unset and you are replying to a message sent by you, NeoMutt will assume that you want to reply to the recipients of that message rather than to yourself.
Also see the “alternates” command.
Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes
If set, when replying to a message, NeoMutt will use the address listed in the Reply-to: header as the recipient of the reply. If unset, it will use the address in the From: header field instead. This option is useful for reading a mailing list that sets the Reply-To: header field to the list address and you want to send a private message to the author of a message.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable provides a toggle. When active, the From: header will be extracted from the current mail's `X-Original-To:' header. This setting does not have precedence over “reverse_realname”.
Assuming `fast_reply' is disabled, this option will prompt the user with a prefilled From: header.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, the cursor will be automatically advanced to the next (possibly undeleted) message whenever a command that modifies the current message is executed.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, draft files (specified by -H
on the command
line) are processed similarly to when resuming a postponed
message. Recipients are not prompted for; send-hooks are not
evaluated; no alias expansion takes place; user-defined headers
and signatures are not added to the message.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, draft files previously edited (via -E -H
on
the command line) will have $resume_draft_files automatically
set when they are used as a draft file again.
The first time a draft file is saved, NeoMutt will add a header, X-Mutt-Resume-Draft to the saved file. The next time the draft file is read in, if NeoMutt sees the header, it will set $resume_draft_files.
This option is designed to prevent multiple signatures, user-defined headers, and other processing effects from being made multiple times to the draft file.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable controls whether or not NeoMutt will display the “personal” name from your aliases in the index menu if it finds an alias that matches the message's sender. For example, if you have the following alias:
alias juser abd30425@somewhere.net (Joe User)
and then you receive mail which contains the following header:
From: abd30425@somewhere.net
It would be displayed in the index menu as “Joe User” instead of “abd30425@somewhere.net.” This is useful when the person's e-mail address is not human friendly.
Type: boolean
Default: no
It may sometimes arrive that you receive mail to a certain machine, move the messages to another machine, and reply to some the messages from there. If this variable is set, the default From: line of the reply messages is built using the address where you received the messages you are replying to if that address matches your “alternates”. If the variable is unset, or the address that would be used doesn't match your “alternates”, the From: line will use your address on the current machine.
Also see the “alternates” command.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable fine-tunes the behavior of the $reverse_name feature. When it is set, NeoMutt will use the address from incoming messages as-is, possibly including eventual real names. When it is unset, NeoMutt will override any such real names with the setting of the $realname variable.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When this variable is set, NeoMutt will decode RFC2047-encoded MIME parameters. You want to set this variable when NeoMutt suggests you to save attachments to files named like:
=?iso-8859-1?Q?file=5F=E4=5F991116=2Ezip?=
When this variable is set interactively, the change won't be active until you change folders.
Note that this use of RFC2047's encoding is explicitly prohibited by the standard, but nevertheless encountered in the wild.
Also note that setting this parameter will not have the effect that NeoMutt generates this kind of encoding. Instead, NeoMutt will unconditionally use the encoding specified in RFC2231.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will take the sender's full address when choosing a default folder for saving a mail. If $save_name or $force_name is set too, the selection of the Fcc folder will be changed as well.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, mailboxes which contain no saved messages will be removed when closed (the exception is $spoolfile which is never removed). If set, mailboxes are never removed.
Note: This only applies to mbox and MMDF folders, NeoMutt does not delete MH and Maildir directories.
Type: number
Default: 0
This variable controls the size of the history (per category) saved in the $history_file file.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable controls how copies of outgoing messages are saved. When set, a check is made to see if a mailbox specified by the recipient address exists (this is done by searching for a mailbox in the $folder directory with the username part of the recipient address). If the mailbox exists, the outgoing message will be saved to that mailbox, otherwise the message is saved to the $record mailbox.
Also see the $force_name variable.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When this variable is unset, scoring is turned off. This can be useful to selectively disable scoring for certain folders when the $score_threshold_delete variable and related are used.
Type: number
Default: -1
Messages which have been assigned a score equal to or lower than the value of this variable are automatically marked for deletion by NeoMutt. Since NeoMutt scores are always greater than or equal to zero, the default setting of this variable will never mark a message for deletion.
Type: number
Default: 9999
Messages which have been assigned a score greater than or equal to this variable's value are automatically marked "flagged".
Type: number
Default: -1
Messages which have been assigned a score equal to or lower than the value of this variable are automatically marked as read by NeoMutt. Since NeoMutt scores are always greater than or equal to zero, the default setting of this variable will never mark a message read.
Type: number
Default: 0
For the pager, this variable specifies the number of lines shown before search results. By default, search results will be top-aligned.
Type: string
Default: “us-ascii:iso-8859-1:utf-8
”
A colon-delimited list of character sets for outgoing messages. NeoMutt will use the first character set into which the text can be converted exactly. If your $charset is not “iso-8859-1” and recipients may not understand “UTF-8”, it is advisable to include in the list an appropriate widely used standard character set (such as “iso-8859-2”, “koi8-r” or “iso-2022-jp”) either instead of or after “iso-8859-1”.
In case the text cannot be converted into one of these exactly, NeoMutt uses $charset as a fallback.
Type: path
Default: “/usr/sbin/sendmail -oem -oi
”
Specifies the program and arguments used to deliver mail sent by NeoMutt.
NeoMutt expects that the specified program interprets additional
arguments as recipient addresses. NeoMutt appends all recipients after
adding a --
delimiter (if not already present). Additional
flags, such as for $use_8bitmime, $use_envelope_from,
$dsn_notify, or $dsn_return will be added before the delimiter.
Type: number
Default: 0
Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the $sendmail process to finish before giving up and putting delivery in the background.
NeoMutt interprets the value of this variable as follows:
>0 | number of seconds to wait for sendmail to finish before continuing |
0 | wait forever for sendmail to finish |
<0 | always put sendmail in the background without waiting |
Note that if you specify a value other than 0, the output of the child process will be put in a temporary file. If there is some error, you will be informed as to where to find the output.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
Command to use when spawning a subshell. By default, the user's login
shell from /etc/passwd
is used.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, info about unsubscribed newsgroups will be saved into “newsrc” file and into cache.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, news server will be asked for new newsgroups on entering the browser. Otherwise, it will be done only once for a news server. Also controls whether or not number of new articles of subscribed newsgroups will be then checked.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, only subscribed newsgroups that contain unread articles will be displayed in browser.
Type: string
Default: “/.
”
This contains the list of characters which you would like to treat as folder separators for displaying paths in the sidebar.
Local mail is often arranged in directories: `dir1/dir2/mailbox'.
set sidebar_delim_chars='/'
IMAP mailboxes are often named: `folder1.folder2.mailbox'.
set sidebar_delim_chars='.'
See also: $sidebar_short_path, $sidebar_folder_indent, $sidebar_indent_string.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This specifies the characters to be drawn between the sidebar (when visible) and the other NeoMutt panels. ASCII and Unicode line-drawing characters are supported.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Set this to indent mailboxes in the sidebar.
See also: $sidebar_short_path, $sidebar_indent_string, $sidebar_delim_chars.
Type: string
Default: “%B%* %n
”
This variable allows you to customize the sidebar display. This string is
similar to $index_format, but has its own set of printf(3)
-like
sequences:
%B | Name of the mailbox |
%S | * Size of mailbox (total number of messages) |
%N | * Number of unread messages in the mailbox |
%n | N if mailbox has new mail, blank otherwise |
%F | * Number of Flagged messages in the mailbox |
%! | “!” : one flagged message; “!!” : two flagged messages; “n!” : n flagged messages (for n > 2). Otherwise prints nothing. |
%d | * @ Number of deleted messages |
%L | * @ Number of messages after limiting |
%t | * @ Number of tagged messages |
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with “X” |
%|X | pad to the end of the line with “X” |
%*X | soft-fill with character “X” as pad |
* = Can be optionally printed if nonzero @ = Only applicable to the current folder
In order to use %S, %N, %F, and %!, $mail_check_stats must be set. When thus set, a suggested value for this option is "%B%?F? [%F]?%* %?N?%N/?%S".
Type: string
Default: “
”
This specifies the string that is used to indent mailboxes in the sidebar. It defaults to two spaces.
See also: $sidebar_short_path, $sidebar_folder_indent, $sidebar_delim_chars.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the sidebar will only display mailboxes containing new, or flagged, mail.
See also: sidebar_whitelist.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the <sidebar-next-new>
command will not stop and the end of
the list of mailboxes, but wrap around to the beginning. The
<sidebar-prev-new>
command is similarly affected, wrapping around to
the end of the list.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the sidebar will appear on the right-hand side of the screen.
Type: boolean
Default: no
By default the sidebar will show the mailbox's path, relative to the
$folder variable. Setting sidebar_shortpath=yes
will shorten the
names relative to the previous name. Here's an example:
shortpath=no | shortpath=yes | shortpath=yes, folderindent=yes, indentstr=".." |
fruit | fruit | fruit
|
fruit.apple | apple | ..apple
|
fruit.banana | banana | ..banana
|
fruit.cherry | cherry | ..cherry
|
See also: $sidebar_delim_chars, $sidebar_folder_indent, $sidebar_indent_string, $sidebar_component_depth.
Type: sort order
Default: order
Specifies how to sort entries in the file browser. By default, the entries are sorted alphabetically. Valid values:
alpha (alphabetically)
count (all message count)
flagged (flagged message count)
name (alphabetically)
new (unread message count)
path (alphabetically)
unread (unread message count)
unsorted
You may optionally use the “reverse-” prefix to specify reverse sorting
order (example: “set sort_browser=reverse-date
”).
Type: number
Default: 0
By default the sidebar will show the mailbox's path, relative to the
$folder variable. This specifies the number of parent directories to hide
from display in the sidebar. For example: If a maildir is normally
displayed in the sidebar as dir1/dir2/dir3/maildir, setting
sidebar_component_depth=2
will display it as dir3/maildir, having
truncated the 2 highest directories.
See also: $sidebar_short_path
Type: boolean
Default: no
This specifies whether or not to show sidebar. The sidebar shows a list of all your mailboxes.
See also: $sidebar_format, $sidebar_width
Type: number
Default: 30
This controls the width of the sidebar. It is measured in screen columns. For example: sidebar_width=20 could display 20 ASCII characters, or 10 Chinese characters.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set, a line containing “-- ” (note the trailing space) will be inserted before your $signature. It is strongly recommended that you not unset this variable unless your signature contains just your name. The reason for this is because many software packages use “-- \n” to detect your signature. For example, NeoMutt has the ability to highlight the signature in a different color in the built-in pager.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, the signature will be included before any quoted or forwarded text. It is strongly recommended that you do not set this variable unless you really know what you are doing, and are prepared to take some heat from netiquette guardians.
Type: path
Default: “~/.signature
”
Specifies the filename of your signature, which is appended to all outgoing messages. If the filename ends with a pipe (“|”), it is assumed that filename is a shell command and input should be read from its standard output.
Type: string
Default: “~f %s | ~s %s
”
Specifies how NeoMutt should expand a simple search into a real search pattern. A simple search is one that does not contain any of the “~” pattern operators. See “patterns” for more information on search patterns.
For example, if you simply type “joe” at a search or limit prompt, NeoMutt will automatically expand it to the value specified by this variable by replacing “%s” with the supplied string. For the default value, “joe” would be expanded to: “~f joe | ~s joe”.
Type: number
Default: 0
Lines of quoted text that are displayed before the unquoted text after “skip to quoted” command (S)
Type: number
Default: 1
Specifies time, in seconds, to pause while displaying certain informational messages, while moving from folder to folder and after expunging messages from the current folder. The default is to pause one second, so a value of zero for this option suppresses the pause.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls the display of lines longer than the screen width in the internal pager. If set, long lines are wrapped at a word boundary. If unset, lines are simply wrapped at the screen edge. Also see the $markers variable.
Type: regular expression
Default: “(>From )|(:[-^]?[][)(><}{|/DP])
”
The pager uses this variable to catch some common false positives of $quote_regexp, most notably smileys and not consider a line quoted text if it also matches $smileys. This mostly happens at the beginning of a line.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This flag controls whether you want to be asked to enter a label for a certificate about to be added to the database or not. It is set by default. (S/MIME only)
Type: path
Default: (empty)
This variable contains the name of either a directory, or a file which contains trusted certificates for use with OpenSSL. (S/MIME only)
Type: path
Default: (empty)
Since for S/MIME there is no pubring/secring as with PGP, NeoMutt has to handle storage and retrieval of keys by itself. This is very basic right now, and keys and certificates are stored in two different directories, both named as the hash-value retrieved from OpenSSL. There is an index file which contains mailbox-address keyid pairs, and which can be manually edited. This option points to the location of the certificates. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This format string specifies a command which is used to decrypt
application/x-pkcs7-mime
attachments.
The OpenSSL command formats have their own set of printf(3)
-like sequences
similar to PGP's:
%f | Expands to the name of a file containing a message. |
%s | Expands to the name of a file containing the signature part
of a multipart/signed attachment when verifying it.
|
%k | The key-pair specified with $smime_default_key |
%i | Intermediate certificates |
%c | One or more certificate IDs. |
%a | The algorithm used for encryption. |
%d | The message digest algorithm specified with $smime_sign_digest_alg. |
%C | CA location: Depending on whether $smime_ca_location points to a directory or file, this expands to “-CApath $smime_ca_location” or “-CAfile $smime_ca_location”. |
For examples on how to configure these formats, see the smime.rc
in
the samples/
subdirectory which has been installed on your system
alongside the documentation.
(S/MIME only)
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set (default) this tells NeoMutt to use the default key for decryption. Otherwise, if managing multiple certificate-key-pairs, NeoMutt will try to use the mailbox-address to determine the key to use. It will ask you to supply a key, if it can't find one. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is the default key-pair to use for signing. This must be set to the keyid (the hash-value that OpenSSL generates) to work properly (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to create encrypted S/MIME messages.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Encrypt the message to $smime_default_key too. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: “aes256
”
This sets the algorithm that should be used for encryption. Valid choices are “aes128”, “aes192”, “aes256”, “des”, “des3”, “rc2-40”, “rc2-64”, “rc2-128”. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to extract X509 certificates from a PKCS7 structure.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to extract the mail address(es) used for storing X509 certificates, and for verification purposes (to check whether the certificate was issued for the sender's mailbox).
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to extract only the signers X509 certificate from a S/MIME signature, so that the certificate's owner may get compared to the email's “From:” field.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to import a certificate via smime_keys.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
The default behavior of NeoMutt is to use PGP on all auto-sign/encryption operations. To override and to use OpenSSL instead this must be set. However, this has no effect while replying, since NeoMutt will automatically select the same application that was used to sign/encrypt the original message. (Note that this variable can be overridden by unsetting $crypt_autosmime.) (S/MIME only)
Type: path
Default: (empty)
Since for S/MIME there is no pubring/secring as with PGP, NeoMutt has to handle storage and retrieval of keys/certs by itself. This is very basic right now, and stores keys and certificates in two different directories, both named as the hash-value retrieved from OpenSSL. There is an index file which contains mailbox-address keyid pair, and which can be manually edited. This option points to the location of the private keys. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to extract PKCS7 structures of S/MIME signatures, in order to extract the public X509 certificate(s).
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, S/MIME encrypted messages will also be encrypted using the certificate in $smime_self_encrypt_as. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is an additional certificate used to encrypt messages when $smime_self_encrypt is set. It is also used to specify the certificate for $postpone_encrypt. It should be the hash-value that OpenSSL generates. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to created S/MIME signatures of type
multipart/signed
, which can be read by all mail clients.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: “sha256
”
This sets the algorithm that should be used for the signature message digest. Valid choices are “md5”, “sha1”, “sha224”, “sha256”, “sha384”, “sha512”. (S/MIME only)
Type: number
Default: 300
The number of seconds after which a cached passphrase will expire if not used. (S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to verify S/MIME signatures of type multipart/signed
.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This command is used to verify S/MIME signatures of type
application/x-pkcs7-mime
.
This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for
possible printf(3)
-like sequences.
(S/MIME only)
Note: On Debian systems, this defaults to the first existing file in the following list: ~/.smime/ca-certificates.crt ~/.smime/ca-bundle.crt /etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
This is a colon-delimited list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to an SMTP server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are any SASL mechanism, e.g. “plain”, “digest-md5”, “gssapi” or “cram-md5”. This option is case-insensitive. If it is “unset” (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure. Support for the “plain” mechanism is bundled; other mechanisms are provided by an external SASL library (look for +USE_SASL in the output of neomutt -v).
Example:
set smtp_authenticators="digest-md5:cram-md5"
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Specifies the password for your SMTP account. If unset, NeoMutt will prompt you for your password when you first send mail via SMTP. See $smtp_url to configure NeoMutt to send mail via SMTP.
Warning: you should only use this option when you are on a fairly secure machine, because the superuser can read your neomuttrc even if you are the only one who can read the file.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Defines the SMTP smarthost where sent messages should relayed for delivery. This should take the form of an SMTP URL, e.g.:
smtp[s]://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]
where “[...]” denotes an optional part. Setting this variable overrides the value of the $sendmail variable.
Type: sort order
Default: date
Specifies how to sort messages in the “index” menu. Valid values are:
date or date-sent
date-received
from
mailbox-order (unsorted)
score
size
spam
subject
threads
to
You may optionally use the “reverse-” prefix to specify reverse sorting order.
Example:
set sort=reverse-date-sent
Type: sort order
Default: alias
Specifies how the entries in the “alias” menu are sorted. The following are legal values:
address (sort alphabetically by email address)
alias (sort alphabetically by alias name)
unsorted (leave in order specified in .neomuttrc)
Type: sort order
Default: date
When sorting by threads, this variable controls how threads are sorted in relation to other threads, and how the branches of the thread trees are sorted. This can be set to any value that $sort can, except “threads” (in that case, NeoMutt will just use “date-sent”). You can also specify the “last-” prefix in addition to the “reverse-” prefix, but “last-” must come after “reverse-”. The “last-” prefix causes messages to be sorted against its siblings by which has the last descendant, using the rest of $sort_aux as an ordering. For instance,
set sort_aux=last-date-received
would mean that if a new message is received in a
thread, that thread becomes the last one displayed (or the first, if
you have “set sort=reverse-threads
”.)
Note: For reversed $sort order $sort_aux is reversed again (which is not the right thing to do, but kept to not break any existing configuration setting).
Type: sort order
Default: alpha
Specifies how to sort entries in the file browser. By default, the entries are sorted alphabetically. Valid values:
alpha (alphabetically)
count (all message count)
date
desc (description)
new (new message count)
size
unsorted
You may optionally use the “reverse-” prefix to specify reverse sorting
order (example: “set sort_browser=reverse-date
”).
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable is only useful when sorting by mailboxes in sidebar. By default, entries are unsorted. Valid values:
count (all message count)
desc (virtual mailbox description)
new (new message count)
path
unsorted
Type: string
Default: “,
”
This variable controls what happens when multiple spam headers are matched: if unset, each successive header will overwrite any previous matches value for the spam label. If set, each successive match will append to the previous, using this variable's value as a separator.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
If your spool mailbox is in a non-default place where NeoMutt cannot find
it, you can specify its location with this variable. NeoMutt will
initially set this variable to the value of the environment
variable $MAIL
or $MAILDIR
if either is defined.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
This variable specifies a file containing trusted CA certificates. Any server certificate that is signed with one of these CA certificates is also automatically accepted. (GnuTLS only)
Example:
set ssl_ca_certificates_file=/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt
Note: On Debian systems, this option is set by default to “threads” in /etc/Muttrc.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
The file containing a client certificate and its associated private key.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If this variable is set, NeoMutt will require that all connections to remote servers be encrypted. Furthermore it will attempt to negotiate TLS even if the server does not advertise the capability, since it would otherwise have to abort the connection anyway. This option supersedes $ssl_starttls.
Type: number
Default: 0
This variable specifies the minimum acceptable prime size (in bits) for use in any Diffie-Hellman key exchange. A value of 0 will use the default from the GNUTLS library. (GnuTLS only)
Type: quadoption
Default: yes
If set (the default), NeoMutt will attempt to use STARTTLS
on servers
advertising the capability. When unset, NeoMutt will not attempt to
use STARTTLS
regardless of the server's capabilities.
Type: boolean
Default: no
This variable specifies whether to attempt to use SSLv3 in the SSL authentication process. Note that SSLv2 and SSLv3 are now considered fundamentally insecure and are no longer recommended.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable specifies whether to attempt to use TLSv1.0 in the SSL authentication process.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable specifies whether to attempt to use TLSv1.1 in the SSL authentication process.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
This variable specifies whether to attempt to use TLSv1.2 in the SSL authentication process.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set (the default), NeoMutt will not automatically accept a server
certificate that is either not yet valid or already expired. You should
only unset this for particular known hosts, using the
<account-hook>
function.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
If set (the default), NeoMutt will not automatically accept a server
certificate whose host name does not match the host used in your folder
URL. You should only unset this for particular known hosts, using
the <account-hook>
function.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Contains a colon-separated list of ciphers to use when using SSL. For OpenSSL, see ciphers(1) for the syntax of the string.
For GnuTLS, this option will be used in place of "NORMAL" at the start of the priority string. See gnutls_priority_init(3) for the syntax and more details. (Note: GnuTLS version 2.1.7 or higher is required.)
Type: string
Default: “-*%A
”
Controls the characters used by the “%r” indicator in $status_format.
Character | Default | Description |
1 | - | Mailbox is unchanged |
2 | * | Mailbox has been changed and needs to be resynchronized |
3 | % | Mailbox is read-only, or will not be written when exiting.
(You can toggle whether to write changes to a mailbox
with the <toggle-write> operation, bound by default
to “%”)
|
4 | A | Folder opened in attach-message mode. (Certain operations like composing a new mail, replying, forwarding, etc. are not permitted in this mode) |
Type: string
Default: “-%r-NeoMutt: %f [Msgs:%?M?%M/?%m%?n? New:%n?%?o? Old:%o?%?d? Del:%d?%?F? Flag:%F?%?t? Tag:%t?%?p? Post:%p?%?b? Inc:%b?%?l? %l?]---(%s/%S)-%>-(%P)---
”
Controls the format of the status line displayed in the “index”
menu. This string is similar to $index_format, but has its own
set of printf(3)
-like sequences:
%b | Number of mailboxes with new mail * |
%d | Number of deleted messages * |
%f | The full pathname of the current mailbox |
%F | Number of flagged messages * |
%h | Local hostname |
%l | Size (in bytes) of the current mailbox * |
%L | Size (in bytes) of the messages shown (i.e., which match the current limit) * |
%m | The number of messages in the mailbox * |
%M | The number of messages shown (i.e., which match the current limit) * |
%n | Number of new messages in the mailbox * |
%o | Number of old unread messages * |
%p | Number of postponed messages * |
%P | Percentage of the way through the index |
%r | Modified/read-only/won't-write/attach-message indicator, According to $status_chars |
%R | Number of read messages * |
%s | Current sorting mode ($sort) |
%S | Current aux sorting method ($sort_aux) |
%t | Number of tagged messages * |
%u | Number of unread messages * |
%v | NeoMutt version string |
%V | Currently active limit pattern, if any * |
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with “X” |
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with “X” |
%*X | Soft-fill with character “X” as pad |
For an explanation of “soft-fill”, see the $index_format documentation.
* = can be optionally printed if nonzero
Some of the above sequences can be used to optionally print a string if their value is nonzero. For example, you may only want to see the number of flagged messages if such messages exist, since zero is not particularly meaningful. To optionally print a string based upon one of the above sequences, the following construct is used:
%?<sequence_char>?<optional_string>?
where sequence_char is a character from the table above, and optional_string is the string you would like printed if sequence_char is nonzero. optional_string may contain other sequences as well as normal text, but you may not nest optional strings.
Here is an example illustrating how to optionally print the number of new messages in a mailbox:
%?n?%n new messages.?
You can also switch between two strings using the following construct:
%?<sequence_char>?<if_string>&<else_string>?
If the value of sequence_char is non-zero, if_string will be expanded, otherwise else_string will be expanded.
You can force the result of any printf(3)
-like sequence to be lowercase
by prefixing the sequence character with an underscore (“_”) sign.
For example, if you want to display the local hostname in lowercase,
you would use: “%_h
”.
If you prefix the sequence character with a colon (“:”) character, NeoMutt will replace any dots in the expansion by underscores. This might be helpful with IMAP folders that don't like dots in folder names.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Setting this variable causes the “status bar” to be displayed on the first line of the screen rather than near the bottom. If $help is set, too it'll be placed at the bottom.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, threading will only make use of the “In-Reply-To” and “References:” fields when you $sort by message threads. By default, messages with the same subject are grouped together in “pseudo threads.”. This may not always be desirable, such as in a personal mailbox where you might have several unrelated messages with the subjects like “hi” which will get grouped together. See also $sort_re for a less drastic way of controlling this behavior.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When unset, NeoMutt won't stop when the user presses the terminal's
susp key, usually “^Z”. This is useful if you run NeoMutt
inside an xterm using a command like “xterm -e neomutt
”.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will generate “format=flowed” bodies with a content type
of “text/plain; format=flowed
”.
This format is easier to handle for some mailing software, and generally
just looks like ordinary text. To actually make use of this format's
features, you'll need support in your editor.
Note that $indent_string is ignored when this option is set.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Affects the ~b
and ~h
search operations described in
section “patterns”. If set, the headers and body/attachments of
messages to be searched are decoded before searching. If unset,
messages are searched as they appear in the folder.
Users searching attachments or for non-ASCII characters should set this value because decoding also includes MIME parsing/decoding and possible character set conversions. Otherwise NeoMutt will attempt to match against the raw message received (for example quoted-printable encoded or with encoded headers) which may lead to incorrect search results.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt uses the date received rather than the date sent to thread messages by subject.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, the internal-pager will pad blank lines to the bottom of the screen with a tilde (“~”).
Type: number
Default: 0
Along with $read_inc, $write_inc, and $net_inc, this variable controls the frequency with which progress updates are displayed. It suppresses updates less than $time_inc milliseconds apart. This can improve throughput on systems with slow terminals, or when running NeoMutt on a remote system.
Also see the “tuning” section of the manual for performance considerations.
Type: number
Default: 600
When NeoMutt is waiting for user input either idling in menus or in an interactive prompt, NeoMutt would block until input is present. Depending on the context, this would prevent certain operations from working, like checking for new mail or keeping an IMAP connection alive.
This variable controls how many seconds NeoMutt will at most wait until it aborts waiting for input, performs these operations and continues to wait for input.
A value of zero or less will cause NeoMutt to never time out.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
This variable allows you to specify where NeoMutt will place its
temporary files needed for displaying and composing messages. If
this variable is not set, the environment variable $TMPDIR
is
used. If $TMPDIR
is not set then “/tmp
” is used.
Type: string
Default: “ +TCFL
”
Controls the character used to indicate mail addressed to you.
Character | Default | Description |
1 | <space> | The mail is not addressed to your address. |
2 | + | You are the only recipient of the message. |
3 | T | Your address appears in the “To:” header field, but you are not the only recipient of the message. |
4 | C | Your address is specified in the “Cc:” header field, but you are not the only recipient. |
5 | F | Indicates the mail that was sent by you. |
6 | L | Indicates the mail was sent to a mailing-list you subscribe to. |
Type: string
Default: “*!DdrONon-
”
Controls the characters used in several flags.
Character | Default | Description |
1 | * | The mail is tagged. |
2 | ! | The mail is flagged as important. |
3 | D | The mail is marked for deletion. |
4 | d | The mail has attachments marked for deletion. |
5 | r | The mail has been replied to. |
6 | O | The mail is Old (Unread but seen). |
7 | N | The mail is New (Unread but not seen). |
8 | o | The mail thread is Old (Unread but seen). |
9 | n | The mail thread is New (Unread but not seen). |
10 | - | The mail is read - %S expando. |
11 | <space> | The mail is read - %Z expando. |
Type: path
Default: (empty)
If set, this variable specifies the path of the trash folder where the mails marked for deletion will be moved, instead of being irremediably purged.
NOTE: When you delete a message in the trash folder, it is really deleted, so that you have a way to clean the trash.
Type: string
Default: “M%?n?AIL&ail?
”
Controls the format of the icon title, as long as “$ts_enabled” is set. This string is identical in formatting to the one used by “$status_format”.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Controls whether NeoMutt tries to set the terminal status line and icon name. Most terminal emulators emulate the status line in the window title.
Type: string
Default: “NeoMutt with %?m?%m messages&no messages?%?n? [%n NEW]?
”
Controls the format of the terminal status line (or window title), provided that “$ts_enabled” has been set. This string is identical in formatting to the one used by “$status_format”.
Type: string
Default: (empty)
Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to open a pipe to a command instead of a raw socket. You may be able to use this to set up preauthenticated connections to your IMAP/POP3/SMTP server. Example:
set tunnel="ssh -q mailhost.net /usr/local/libexec/imapd"
Note: For this example to work you must be able to log in to the remote machine without having to enter a password.
When set, NeoMutt uses the tunnel for all remote connections. Please see “account-hook” in the manual for how to use different tunnel commands per connection.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will jump to the next unread message, if any, when the current thread is uncollapsed.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will automatically uncollapse any collapsed thread that receives a new message. When unset, collapsed threads will remain collapsed. the presence of the new message will still affect index sorting, though.
Type: boolean
Default: no
Warning: do not set this variable unless you are using a version
of sendmail which supports the -B8BITMIME
flag (such as sendmail
8.8.x) or you may not be able to send mail.
When set, NeoMutt will invoke $sendmail with the -B8BITMIME
flag when sending 8-bit messages to enable ESMTP negotiation.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will qualify all local addresses (ones without the “@host” portion) with the value of $hostname. If unset, no addresses will be qualified.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will set the envelope sender of the message. If $envelope_from_address is set, it will be used as the sender address. If unset, NeoMutt will attempt to derive the sender from the “From:” header.
Note that this information is passed to sendmail command using the
-f
command line switch. Therefore setting this option is not useful
if the $sendmail variable already contains -f
or if the
executable pointed to by $sendmail doesn't support the -f
switch.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will generate the “From:” header field when sending messages. If unset, no “From:” header field will be generated unless the user explicitly sets one using the “my_hdr” command.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will look for IPv6 addresses of hosts it tries to contact. If this option is unset, NeoMutt will restrict itself to IPv4 addresses. Normally, the default should work.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will add a “User-Agent:” header to outgoing messages, indicating which version of NeoMutt was used for composing them.
Type: path
Default: (empty)
Specifies the visual editor to invoke when the “~v
” command is
given in the built-in editor.
Type: string
Default: “%2C %?n?%4n/& ?%4m %f
”
This variable allows you to customize the file browser display for virtual folders to your personal taste. This string uses many of the same expandos as $folder_format.
Type: boolean
Default: no
When set, NeoMutt will use the first defined virtual mailbox (see virtual-mailboxes) as a spool file.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether NeoMutt will ask you to press a key after an external command
has been invoked by these functions: <shell-escape>
,
<pipe-message>
, <pipe-entry>
, <print-message>
,
and <print-entry>
commands.
It is also used when viewing attachments with “auto_view”, provided that the corresponding mailcap entry has a needsterminal flag, and the external program is interactive.
When set, NeoMutt will always ask for a key. When unset, NeoMutt will wait for a key only if the external command returned a non-zero status.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
When set, NeoMutt will weed headers when displaying, forwarding, printing, or replying to messages.
Type: number
Default: 0
When set to a positive value, NeoMutt will wrap text at $wrap characters. When set to a negative value, NeoMutt will wrap text so that there are $wrap characters of empty space on the right side of the terminal. Setting it to zero makes NeoMutt wrap at the terminal width.
Also see $reflow_wrap.
Type: number
Default: 78
This option specifies the number of characters to use for wrapping an outgoing message's headers. Allowed values are between 78 and 998 inclusive.
Note: This option usually shouldn't be changed. RFC5233 recommends a line length of 78 (the default), so please only change this setting when you know what you're doing.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether searches wrap around the end.
When set, searches will wrap around the first (or last) item. When unset, incremental searches will not wrap.
Type: number
Default: 0
(DEPRECATED) Equivalent to setting $wrap with a negative value.
Type: boolean
Default: yes
Controls whether NeoMutt writes out the “Bcc:” header when preparing messages to be sent. Exim users may wish to unset this. If NeoMutt is set to deliver directly via SMTP (see $smtp_url), this option does nothing: NeoMutt will never write out the “Bcc:” header in this case.
Note: On Debian systems, exim4 and postfix strip BCC headers by default. The above warning applies to exim3 users, see /etc/Muttrc.
Type: number
Default: 10
When writing a mailbox, a message will be printed every $write_inc messages to indicate progress. If set to 0, only a single message will be displayed before writing a mailbox.
Also see the $read_inc, $net_inc and $time_inc variables and the “tuning” section of the manual for performance considerations.
Type: boolean
Default: no
If set, NeoMutt will add “X-Comment-To:” field (that contains full name of original article author) to article that followuped to newsgroup.
The following is the list of available functions listed by the mapping in which they are available. The default key setting is given, and an explanation of what the function does. The key bindings of these functions can be changed with the bind command.
The generic menu is not a real menu, but specifies common functions (such as movement) available in all menus except for pager and editor. Changing settings for this menu will affect the default bindings for all menus (except as noted).
Table 9.2. Default Generic Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<top-page> | H | move to the top of the page |
<next-entry> | j | move to the next entry |
<previous-entry> | k | move to the previous entry |
<bottom-page> | L | move to the bottom of the page |
<refresh> | ^L | clear and redraw the screen |
<middle-page> | M | move to the middle of the page |
<search-next> | n | search for next match |
<exit> | q | exit this menu |
<tag-entry> | t | tag the current entry |
<next-page> | z | move to the next page |
<previous-page> | Z | move to the previous page |
<last-entry> | * | move to the last entry |
<first-entry> | = | move to the first entry |
<enter-command> | : | enter a neomuttrc command |
<next-line> | > | scroll down one line |
<previous-line> | < | scroll up one line |
<half-up> | [ | scroll up 1/2 page |
<half-down> | ] | scroll down 1/2 page |
<help> | ? | this screen |
<tag-prefix> | ; | apply next function to tagged messages |
<tag-prefix-cond> | apply next function ONLY to tagged messages | |
<end-cond> | end of conditional execution (noop) | |
<shell-escape> | ! | invoke a command in a subshell |
<select-entry> | <Enter> | select the current entry |
<select-entry> | <Return> | select the current entry |
<search> | / | search for a regular expression |
<search-reverse> | Esc / | search backwards for a regular expression |
<search-opposite> | search for next match in opposite direction | |
<jump> | jump to an index number | |
<current-top> | move entry to top of screen | |
<current-middle> | move entry to middle of screen | |
<current-bottom> | move entry to bottom of screen | |
<what-key> | display the keycode for a key press |
Table 9.3. Default Index Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<create-alias> | a | create an alias from a message sender |
<bounce-message> | b | remail a message to another user |
<break-thread> | # | break the thread in two |
<change-folder> | c | open a different folder |
<change-folder-readonly> | Esc c | open a different folder in read only mode |
<change-newsgroup> | open a different newsgroup | |
<change-newsgroup-readonly> | open a different newsgroup in read only mode | |
<next-unread-mailbox> | open next mailbox with new mail | |
<collapse-thread> | Esc v | collapse/uncollapse current thread |
<collapse-all> | Esc V | collapse/uncollapse all threads |
<copy-message> | C | copy a message to a file/mailbox |
<decode-copy> | Esc C | make decoded (text/plain) copy |
<decode-save> | Esc s | make decoded copy (text/plain) and delete |
<delete-message> | d | delete the current entry |
<delete-pattern> | D | delete messages matching a pattern |
<delete-thread> | ^D | delete all messages in thread |
<delete-subthread> | Esc d | delete all messages in subthread |
<edit> | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms) | |
<edit-raw-message> | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms) | |
<edit-label> | Y | add, change, or delete a message's label |
<edit-or-view-raw-message> | e | edit the raw message if the mailbox is not read-only, otherwise view it |
<edit-type> | ^E | edit attachment content type |
<forward-message> | f | forward a message with comments |
<forward-to-group> | forward to newsgroup | |
<followup-message> | followup to newsgroup | |
<get-children> | get all children of the current message | |
<get-message> | get message with Message-Id | |
<get-parent> | get parent of the current message | |
<reconstruct-thread> | reconstruct thread containing current message | |
<flag-message> | F | toggle a message's 'important' flag |
<group-reply> | g | reply to all recipients |
<fetch-mail> | G | retrieve mail from POP server |
<imap-fetch-mail> | force retrieval of mail from IMAP server | |
<imap-logout-all> | logout from all IMAP servers | |
<display-toggle-weed> | h | display message and toggle header weeding |
<next-undeleted> | j | move to the next undeleted message |
<previous-undeleted> | k | move to the previous undeleted message |
<limit> | l | show only messages matching a pattern |
<limit-current-thread> | limit view to current thread | |
<link-threads> | & | link tagged message to the current one |
<list-reply> | L | reply to specified mailing list |
<mail> | m | compose a new mail message |
<toggle-new> | N | toggle a message's 'new' flag |
<toggle-write> | % | toggle whether the mailbox will be rewritten |
<next-thread> | ^N | jump to the next thread |
<next-subthread> | Esc n | jump to the next subthread |
<purge-message> | delete the current entry, bypassing the trash folder | |
<purge-thread> | delete the current thread, bypassing the trash folder | |
<query> | Q | query external program for addresses |
<quit> | q | save changes to mailbox and quit |
<reply> | r | reply to a message |
<show-limit> | Esc l | show currently active limit pattern |
<sort-mailbox> | o | sort messages |
<sort-reverse> | O | sort messages in reverse order |
<print-message> | p | print the current entry |
<post-message> | post message to newsgroup | |
<previous-thread> | ^P | jump to previous thread |
<previous-subthread> | Esc p | jump to previous subthread |
<recall-message> | R | recall a postponed message |
<read-thread> | ^R | mark the current thread as read |
<read-subthread> | Esc r | mark the current subthread as read |
<resend-message> | Esc e | use the current message as a template for a new one |
<compose-to-sender> | compose a new message to the sender | |
<save-message> | s | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file |
<tag-pattern> | T | tag messages matching a pattern |
<tag-subthread> | tag the current subthread | |
<tag-thread> | Esc t | tag the current thread |
<untag-pattern> | ^T | untag messages matching a pattern |
<undelete-message> | u | undelete the current entry |
<undelete-pattern> | U | undelete messages matching a pattern |
<undelete-subthread> | Esc u | undelete all messages in subthread |
<undelete-thread> | ^U | undelete all messages in thread |
<view-attachments> | v | show MIME attachments |
<view-raw-message> | show the raw message | |
<show-version> | V | show the NeoMutt version number and date |
<set-flag> | w | set a status flag on a message |
<clear-flag> | W | clear a status flag from a message |
<toggle-read> | toggle view of read messages | |
<catchup> | mark all articles in newsgroup as read | |
<display-message> | <Enter> | display a message |
<display-message> | <Return> | display a message |
<mark-message> | ~ | create a hotkey macro for the current message |
<buffy-list> | . | list mailboxes with new mail |
<sync-mailbox> | $ | save changes to mailbox |
<display-address> | @ | display full address of sender |
<pipe-message> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<next-new> | jump to the next new message | |
<next-new-then-unread> | <Tab> | jump to the next new or unread message |
<previous-new> | jump to the previous new message | |
<previous-new-then-unread> | Esc <Tab> | jump to the previous new or unread message |
<next-unread> | jump to the next unread message | |
<previous-unread> | jump to the previous unread message | |
<parent-message> | P | jump to parent message in thread |
<root-message> | jump to root message in thread | |
<extract-keys> | ^K | extract supported public keys |
<forget-passphrase> | ^F | wipe passphrase(s) from memory |
<check-traditional-pgp> | Esc P | check for classic PGP |
<mail-key> | Esc k | mail a PGP public key |
<decrypt-copy> | make decrypted copy | |
<decrypt-save> | make decrypted copy and delete | |
<quasi-delete> | delete from NeoMutt, don't touch on disk | |
<sidebar-next> | move the highlight to next mailbox | |
<sidebar-next-new> | move the highlight to next mailbox with new mail | |
<sidebar-open> | open highlighted mailbox | |
<sidebar-page-down> | scroll the sidebar down 1 page | |
<sidebar-page-up> | scroll the sidebar up 1 page | |
<sidebar-prev> | move the highlight to previous mailbox | |
<sidebar-prev-new> | move the highlight to previous mailbox with new mail | |
<sidebar-toggle-virtual> | toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes | |
<sidebar-toggle-visible> | make the sidebar (in)visible | |
<modify-tags> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags | |
<modify-tags-then-hide> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message | |
<modify-labels> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags | |
<modify-labels-then-hide> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message | |
<change-vfolder> | open a different virtual folder | |
<vfolder-from-query> | generate virtual folder from query | |
<vfolder-window-backward> | shifts virtual folder time window backwards | |
<vfolder-window-forward> | shifts virtual folder time window forwards | |
<entire-thread> | read entire thread of the current message |
Table 9.4. Default Pager Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<break-thread> | # | break the thread in two |
<create-alias> | a | create an alias from a message sender |
<bounce-message> | b | remail a message to another user |
<change-folder> | c | open a different folder |
<change-folder-readonly> | Esc c | open a different folder in read only mode |
<change-newsgroup> | open a different newsgroup | |
<change-newsgroup-readonly> | open a different newsgroup in read only mode | |
<next-unread-mailbox> | open next mailbox with new mail | |
<copy-message> | C | copy a message to a file/mailbox |
<decode-copy> | Esc C | make decoded (text/plain) copy |
<delete-message> | d | delete the current entry |
<delete-thread> | ^D | delete all messages in thread |
<delete-subthread> | Esc d | delete all messages in subthread |
<set-flag> | w | set a status flag on a message |
<clear-flag> | W | clear a status flag from a message |
<edit> | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms) | |
<edit-raw-message> | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms) | |
<edit-label> | Y | add, change, or delete a message's label |
<edit-or-view-raw-message> | e | edit the raw message if the mailbox is not read-only, otherwise view it |
<edit-type> | ^E | edit attachment content type |
<followup-message> | followup to newsgroup | |
<forward-to-group> | forward to newsgroup | |
<forward-message> | f | forward a message with comments |
<flag-message> | F | toggle a message's 'important' flag |
<group-reply> | g | reply to all recipients |
<imap-fetch-mail> | force retrieval of mail from IMAP server | |
<imap-logout-all> | logout from all IMAP servers | |
<display-toggle-weed> | h | display message and toggle header weeding |
<next-undeleted> | j | move to the next undeleted message |
<next-entry> | J | move to the next entry |
<previous-undeleted> | k | move to the previous undeleted message |
<previous-entry> | K | move to the previous entry |
<link-threads> | & | link tagged message to the current one |
<list-reply> | L | reply to specified mailing list |
<redraw-screen> | ^L | clear and redraw the screen |
<mail> | m | compose a new mail message |
<mark-as-new> | N | toggle a message's 'new' flag |
<search-next> | n | search for next match |
<next-thread> | ^N | jump to the next thread |
<next-subthread> | Esc n | jump to the next subthread |
<sort-mailbox> | o | sort messages |
<sort-reverse> | O | sort messages in reverse order |
<print-message> | p | print the current entry |
<post-message> | post message to newsgroup | |
<previous-thread> | ^P | jump to previous thread |
<previous-subthread> | Esc p | jump to previous subthread |
<purge-message> | delete the current entry, bypassing the trash folder | |
<purge-thread> | delete the current thread, bypassing the trash folder | |
<quit> | Q | save changes to mailbox and quit |
<exit> | q | exit this menu |
<reply> | r | reply to a message |
<recall-message> | R | recall a postponed message |
<reconstruct-thread> | reconstruct thread containing current message | |
<read-thread> | ^R | mark the current thread as read |
<read-subthread> | Esc r | mark the current subthread as read |
<resend-message> | Esc e | use the current message as a template for a new one |
<compose-to-sender> | compose a new message to the sender | |
<save-message> | s | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file |
<skip-quoted> | S | skip beyond quoted text |
<decode-save> | Esc s | make decoded copy (text/plain) and delete |
<tag-message> | t | tag the current entry |
<toggle-quoted> | T | toggle display of quoted text |
<undelete-message> | u | undelete the current entry |
<undelete-subthread> | Esc u | undelete all messages in subthread |
<undelete-thread> | ^U | undelete all messages in thread |
<view-attachments> | v | show MIME attachments |
<view-raw-message> | show the raw message | |
<show-version> | V | show the NeoMutt version number and date |
<search-toggle> | \\ | toggle search pattern coloring |
<display-address> | @ | display full address of sender |
<next-new> | jump to the next new message | |
<next-new-then-unread> | <Tab> | jump to the next new or unread message |
<pipe-message> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<help> | ? | this screen |
<next-page> | <Space> | move to the next page |
<previous-page> | - | move to the previous page |
<top> | ^ | jump to the top of the message |
<sync-mailbox> | $ | save changes to mailbox |
<shell-escape> | ! | invoke a command in a subshell |
<enter-command> | : | enter a neomuttrc command |
<buffy-list> | . | list mailboxes with new mail |
<search> | / | search for a regular expression |
<search-reverse> | Esc / | search backwards for a regular expression |
<search-opposite> | search for next match in opposite direction | |
<next-line> | <Enter> | scroll down one line |
<next-line> | <Return> | scroll down one line |
<jump> | jump to an index number | |
<next-unread> | jump to the next unread message | |
<previous-new> | jump to the previous new message | |
<previous-new-then-unread> | jump to the previous new or unread message | |
<previous-unread> | jump to the previous unread message | |
<half-up> | scroll up 1/2 page | |
<half-down> | scroll down 1/2 page | |
<previous-line> | scroll up one line | |
<bottom> | jump to the bottom of the message | |
<parent-message> | P | jump to parent message in thread |
<root-message> | jump to root message in thread | |
<check-traditional-pgp> | Esc P | check for classic PGP |
<mail-key> | Esc k | mail a PGP public key |
<extract-keys> | ^K | extract supported public keys |
<forget-passphrase> | ^F | wipe passphrase(s) from memory |
<decrypt-copy> | make decrypted copy | |
<decrypt-save> | make decrypted copy and delete | |
<what-key> | display the keycode for a key press | |
<quasi-delete> | delete from NeoMutt, don't touch on disk | |
<sidebar-next> | move the highlight to next mailbox | |
<sidebar-next-new> | move the highlight to next mailbox with new mail | |
<sidebar-open> | open highlighted mailbox | |
<sidebar-page-down> | scroll the sidebar down 1 page | |
<sidebar-page-up> | scroll the sidebar up 1 page | |
<sidebar-prev> | move the highlight to previous mailbox | |
<sidebar-prev-new> | move the highlight to previous mailbox with new mail | |
<sidebar-toggle-virtual> | toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes | |
<sidebar-toggle-visible> | make the sidebar (in)visible | |
<modify-tags> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags | |
<modify-tags-then-hide> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message | |
<modify-labels> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags | |
<modify-labels-then-hide> | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message | |
<change-vfolder> | open a different virtual folder | |
<vfolder-from-query> | generate virtual folder from query | |
<entire-thread> | read entire thread of the current message |
Table 9.5. Default Alias Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<delete-entry> | d | delete the current entry |
<undelete-entry> | u | undelete the current entry |
Table 9.6. Default Query Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<create-alias> | a | create an alias from a message sender |
<mail> | m | compose a new mail message |
<query> | Q | query external program for addresses |
<query-append> | A | append new query results to current results |
Table 9.7. Default Attachment Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<bounce-message> | b | remail a message to another user |
<display-toggle-weed> | h | display message and toggle header weeding |
<edit-type> | ^E | edit attachment content type |
<followup-message> | followup to newsgroup | |
<forward-to-group> | forward to newsgroup | |
<print-entry> | p | print the current entry |
<save-entry> | s | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file |
<pipe-entry> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<view-mailcap> | m | force viewing of attachment using mailcap |
<reply> | r | reply to a message |
<resend-message> | Esc e | use the current message as a template for a new one |
<group-reply> | g | reply to all recipients |
<list-reply> | L | reply to specified mailing list |
<forward-message> | f | forward a message with comments |
<view-text> | T | view attachment as text |
<view-attach> | <Enter> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary |
<view-attach> | <Return> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary |
<delete-entry> | d | delete the current entry |
<undelete-entry> | u | undelete the current entry |
<collapse-parts> | v | toggle display of subparts |
<check-traditional-pgp> | Esc P | check for classic PGP |
<extract-keys> | ^K | extract supported public keys |
<forget-passphrase> | ^F | wipe passphrase(s) from memory |
Table 9.8. Default Compose Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<attach-file> | a | attach file(s) to this message |
<attach-message> | A | attach message(s) to this message |
<attach-news-message> | attach news article(s) to this message | |
<edit-bcc> | b | edit the BCC list |
<edit-cc> | c | edit the CC list |
<copy-file> | C | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file |
<detach-file> | D | delete the current entry |
<toggle-disposition> | ^D | toggle disposition between inline/attachment |
<edit-description> | d | edit attachment description |
<edit-message> | e | edit the message |
<edit-headers> | E | edit the message with headers |
<edit-file> | ^X e | edit the file to be attached |
<edit-encoding> | ^E | edit attachment transfer-encoding |
<edit-from> | Esc f | edit the from field |
<edit-fcc> | f | enter a file to save a copy of this message in |
<filter-entry> | F | filter attachment through a shell command |
<get-attachment> | G | get a temporary copy of an attachment |
<display-toggle-weed> | h | display message and toggle header weeding |
<ispell> | i | run ispell on the message |
<print-entry> | l | print the current entry |
<edit-mime> | m | edit attachment using mailcap entry |
<new-mime> | n | compose new attachment using mailcap entry |
<edit-newsgroups> | edit the newsgroups list | |
<edit-followup-to> | edit the Followup-To field | |
<edit-x-comment-to> | edit the X-Comment-To field | |
<postpone-message> | P | save this message to send later |
<edit-reply-to> | r | edit the Reply-To field |
<rename-attachment> | ^O | send attachment with a different name |
<rename-file> | R | rename/move an attached file |
<edit-subject> | s | edit the subject of this message |
<edit-to> | t | edit the TO list |
<edit-type> | ^T | edit attachment content type |
<write-fcc> | w | write the message to a folder |
<toggle-unlink> | u | toggle whether to delete file after sending it |
<toggle-recode> | toggle recoding of this attachment | |
<update-encoding> | U | update an attachment's encoding info |
<view-attach> | <Enter> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary |
<view-attach> | <Return> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary |
<send-message> | y | send the message |
<pipe-entry> | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command |
<attach-key> | Esc k | attach a PGP public key |
<pgp-menu> | p | show PGP options |
<forget-passphrase> | ^F | wipe passphrase(s) from memory |
<smime-menu> | S | show S/MIME options |
<mix> | M | send the message through a mixmaster remailer chain |
Table 9.9. Default Postpone Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<delete-entry> | d | delete the current entry |
<undelete-entry> | u | undelete the current entry |
Table 9.10. Default Browser Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<change-dir> | c | change directories |
<display-filename> | @ | display the currently selected file's name |
<enter-mask> | m | enter a file mask |
<sort> | o | sort messages |
<sort-reverse> | O | sort messages in reverse order |
<select-new> | N | select a new file in this directory |
<check-new> | check mailboxes for new mail | |
<toggle-mailboxes> | <Tab> | toggle whether to browse mailboxes or all files |
<reload-active> | load list of all newsgroups from NNTP server | |
<subscribe-pattern> | subscribe to newsgroups matching a pattern | |
<unsubscribe-pattern> | unsubscribe from newsgroups matching a pattern | |
<catchup> | mark all articles in newsgroup as read | |
<uncatchup> | mark all articles in newsgroup as unread | |
<view-file> | <Space> | view file |
<buffy-list> | . | list mailboxes with new mail |
<create-mailbox> | C | create a new mailbox (IMAP only) |
<delete-mailbox> | d | delete the current mailbox (IMAP only) |
<rename-mailbox> | r | rename the current mailbox (IMAP only) |
<subscribe> | s | subscribe to current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) |
<unsubscribe> | u | unsubscribe from current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only) |
<toggle-subscribed> | T | toggle view all/subscribed mailboxes (IMAP only) |
<goto-folder> | = | swap the current folder position with $folder if it exists |
Table 9.11. Default Pgp Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<verify-key> | c | verify a PGP public key |
<view-name> | % | view the key's user id |
Table 9.12. Default Smime Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<verify-key> | c | verify a PGP public key |
<view-name> | % | view the key's user id |
Table 9.13. Default Mixmaster Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<accept> | <Enter> | accept the chain constructed |
<accept> | <Return> | accept the chain constructed |
<append> | a | append a remailer to the chain |
<insert> | i | insert a remailer into the chain |
<delete> | d | delete a remailer from the chain |
<chain-prev> | <Left> | select the previous element of the chain |
<chain-next> | <Right> | select the next element of the chain |
Table 9.14. Default Editor Menu Bindings
Function | Default key | Description |
---|---|---|
<bol> | ^A | jump to the beginning of the line |
<backward-char> | ^B | move the cursor one character to the left |
<backward-word> | Esc b | move the cursor to the beginning of the word |
<capitalize-word> | Esc c | capitalize the word |
<downcase-word> | Esc l | convert the word to lower case |
<upcase-word> | Esc u | convert the word to upper case |
<delete-char> | ^D | delete the char under the cursor |
<eol> | ^E | jump to the end of the line |
<forward-char> | ^F | move the cursor one character to the right |
<forward-word> | Esc f | move the cursor to the end of the word |
<backspace> | <Backspace> | delete the char in front of the cursor |
<kill-eol> | ^K | delete chars from cursor to end of line |
<kill-eow> | Esc d | delete chars from the cursor to the end of the word |
<kill-line> | ^U | delete all chars on the line |
<quote-char> | ^V | quote the next typed key |
<kill-word> | ^W | delete the word in front of the cursor |
<complete> | <Tab> | complete filename or alias |
<complete-query> | ^T | complete address with query |
<buffy-cycle> | <Space> | cycle among incoming mailboxes |
<history-up> | scroll up through the history list | |
<history-down> | scroll down through the history list | |
<transpose-chars> | transpose character under cursor with previous |
Table of Contents
Kari Hurtta
<kari.hurtta@fmi.fi>
co-developed the original MIME parsing
code back in the ELM-ME days.
The following people have been very helpful to the development of Mutt:
Vikas Agnihotri
<vikasa@writeme.com>
Francois Berjon
<Francois.Berjon@aar.alcatel-alsthom.fr>
Aric Blumer
<aric@fore.com>
John Capo
<jc@irbs.com>
David Champion
<dgc@uchicago.edu>
Brendan Cully
<brendan@kublai.com>
Liviu Daia
<daia@stoilow.imar.ro>
Thomas E. Dickey
<dickey@herndon4.his.com>
David DeSimone
<fox@convex.hp.com>
Nickolay N. Dudorov
<nnd@wint.itfs.nsk.su>
Ruslan Ermilov
<ru@freebsd.org>
Edmund Grimley Evans
<edmundo@rano.org>
Michael Finken
<finken@conware.de>
Sven Guckes
<guckes@math.fu-berlin.de>
Lars Hecking
<lhecking@nmrc.ie>
Mark Holloman
<holloman@nando.net>
Andreas Holzmann
<holzmann@fmi.uni-passau.de>
Marco d'Itri
<md@linux.it>
Björn Jacke
<bjacke@suse.com>
Byrial Jensen
<byrial@image.dk>
David Jeske
<jeske@igcom.net>
Christophe Kalt
<kalt@hugo.int-evry.fr>
Tommi Komulainen
<Tommi.Komulainen@iki.fi>
Felix von Leitner (a.k.a
“Fefe”)
<leitner@math.fu-berlin.de>
Brandon Long
<blong@fiction.net>
Jimmy Mäkelä
<jmy@flashback.net>
Lars Marowsky-Bree
<lmb@pointer.in-minden.de>
Thomas
“Mike” Michlmayr
<mike@cosy.sbg.ac.at>
Andrew W. Nosenko
<awn@bcs.zp.ua>
David O'Brien
<obrien@Nuxi.cs.ucdavis.edu>
Clint Olsen
<olsenc@ichips.intel.com>
Park Myeong Seok
<pms@romance.kaist.ac.kr>
Thomas Parmelan
<tom@ankh.fr.eu.org>
Ollivier Robert
<roberto@keltia.freenix.fr>
Thomas Roessler
<roessler@does-not-exist.org>
Roland Rosenfeld
<roland@spinnaker.de>
Rocco Rutte
<pdmef@gmx.net>
TAKIZAWA Takashi
<taki@luna.email.ne.jp>
Allain Thivillon
<Allain.Thivillon@alma.fr>
Gero Treuner
<gero@70t.de>
Vsevolod Volkov
<vvv@lucky.net>
Ken Weinert
<kenw@ihs.com>
This document was written in DocBook, and then rendered using the Gnome XSLT toolkit.